Home

Chapter 2 System Design and Installation

Contents

1. Specifications Chapter 5 e Wiring No No es g No Signal 1 A 1 NE x 1 Cw 2 B 1 A N 2 CW 2 y y 3 CWW 4 B 2 L PS 4 CWW 5 3 gt 5 ECRST 6 B 3 6 ECRST 7 A 4 m yoo 7 BKR 8 B 4 SU 8 INP 9 A 5 m Y 9 10 4 10 OGND 11 4 A 6 EE N 11 B 2 3 ex 12 18 A 7 13 24 VIN 14 7 V E 14 RUN 15 A 8 15 MIGN 16 8 m 16 POT 17 9 N 17 18 B Bl 18 RESET 19 4 A 10 m 19 20 B 10 NA V 20 2 A 1 21 22218 1 A um 22 2 12 P 23 24 Y 24 25 143 2 25 26 B 13 y 26 27 A 14 N Ex 27 28 B 14 mn 28 29 A 15 A 29 B 15 30 31 A 16 SN A 4 31 32 B 16 P 32 Z 83 17 AN A 383 ZCOM 34 B 17 N s 34 35 A 18 i 35 ALMCOM 36 _ B 18 e Shell FG A 1 5 B io Cable AWG24 x 18P Connector plug Sumitomo 3M s 10136 3000VE 39 A 20 Connector cover 40 B 20 Sumitomo 3M s 10336 52A0 008 Connector plug Fujitsu s FCN 361J040 AU Connector cover Fujitsu s FCN 360C040 B 5 29 Specifications Chapter 5 m General purpose Contro
2. MOCB Main circuit power supply MC ua EN 5 ss MC Main rcuit contact 100 115 50 60 Hz x R88D UEPLIDH I 2 MEC ud 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 ee PO i EN TO 69 l Class 3 ground R88D UEP AC Servomotor Driver C200H NC112 gt TB Contents Terminal CN 1 R or MS T HI 8 Output power supply input 24 VDC 1 A Connect external Regen AC Servomotor 24 VDC eration Unit as required A N 7 R88A CAUDOOS CAREER E U Power Cable N Output power supply input 5 VDC B V CCW with resistance 3 A z e w e HS M 3 COW without resistanos B 2 CW with resistance 2 CW Du CW without resistance B CN2 A ON 5 rg ECRST a Deviation counter reset output 6 A ECRST gt Pal R88A CRU e E A ZCOM Encoder Cable Origin input 11 7 Positioning completed input 9 24VIN Position proximity input 10 RUN A RESET CCW limit input 12 ALMCOM CW limit input 13 AM A External interrupt input 19 1 Emergency stop input 20 A Eier ad Cable Note 1 Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to Units and the Servo Driver Note 2 Leave unused signal lines open and do not
3. O O O O O O ololololo otojololo OJO G70A ZOC16 3 G2R 1 S N relays e e G70D SOC16 CQM1H 16 point PNP Output Module G70A Relay Block CQM1 OD214 16 PNP outputs G79 Y100C 1 m G79 Y150C 1 5 m G79 Y200C 2 m G70A ZOC16 4 G79 Y300C 3 m G2R 1 S N relays G79 Y500C 5 m OOJO O Reference Information CQM1H High Density I O Modules XW2B Screw Terminal Blocks CQM1H 32 Point I O Modules XW2Z 50B 0 5 m XW2Z 100B 1 XW2Z 150B 1 5 m XW2Z 200B 2 m XW2Z 300B 3 m XW2Z 500B 5 m CQM1 1D213 32 NPN inputs 1 10214 32 NPN inputs CQM1 0D213 32 NPN outputs CQM1 0D216 32 PNP outputs XW2B 40G5 XW2B 40G4 Reference Information CQM1H High Density Input Modules XW2C Input Screw Terminal Blocks CQM1H 32 Point Input Modules 1 15 2 3 5m 0 75 1 25 1 75 2 75 4 75 m CQM1 1D213 32 NPN inputs 1 10214 32 NPN inputs I I XW2Z 100D 1 m 0 75 m XW2Z 150D 1 5 m 1 25 XW2Z 200D 2 m 1 75 m i I I I XW2Z 300D 3 m 2 75 m XW2Z 500D 5
4. e Wiring Symbol No ros No Symbol AWG24 blue A 1 16 2 AWG24 white blue 17 A B 3 AWG24 yellow 18 B B 4 Awaz white yellow 19 B S 5 AWG24 green 14 S S 6 AWG24 white green 15 S Eov 7 AWG22 black 1 EOV AWG22 red E5V 8 wea 4 E5V FG 9 green yellow 20 EROR TE Shell FG Cable AWG22 x 3C AWG24 x 3P UL2589 5 33 Specifications Chapter 5 Cable Side Connector model 17J E 13090 02D8A DDK Connector plug model 10120 3000VE Sumitomo 3M Connector case model 10320 52A0 008 Sumitomo 3M 5 3 3 Power Cable m Power Cable for Servomotors Without Brakes Non conforming Models e Types of Cable Model Length L Outer diameter of sheath 3m R88A CAU003S R88A CAU005S R88A CAU010S R88A CAU015S R88A CAU020S Up to a maximum of 20 m between the Monitor and the Servo Driver e Connection Configuration OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver e Wiring Symbol AWG20 Red E U phase 1 AWG20 Whit LIO V phase 2 e TO W phase 3 ANED BIUS TO GR 4 AWG20 Green 20 Cable AWG20 4 Crimp style terminal UL2517 Cable Side Connector housing model 172159 1 Nippon Amp Connector socket contact model 170366 1 Nippon Amp 5 34 Specifications Chapter 5 Crimping tool 7
5. 4 6 4 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions 4 8 4 2 1 Alarm Displays and Alarm Code Outputs 4 8 4 2 2 Alarm Output assasi RP RR REP EE PR 4 8 4 2 3 Overload Characteristics Electron Thermal Characteristics 4 10 4 2 4 Alarm History Display Mode 4 11 4 3 Troubleshooting nee respon a Sika ue eem PRESS Gah gia BG m EE TRE 4 12 4 4 Periodic Maintenance 1 4 17 Chapter 5 Specifications 5 1 5 1 Servo Driver Specifications 5 2 S 121 General Specifications ERO E DP 5 2 5 1 2 Performance Specifications 5 3 5 1 3 Specifications 2 5 7 5 1 4 Explanation of User Parameters 5 19 5 2 Servomotor Specifications 2 5 21 5 25 General Specifications eo erbe er eR era a Seve 5 21 5 2 2 Performance Specifications 5 22 5 2 3 Torque and Rotational Speed Characteristics 5 25 5 2 4 Allowable Loads on Servo
6. Servo Driver Servomotor No fuse R88D R88M breaker Surge Noise filter Contactor U MCCB absorber Xi TB TB Metal duct 9 me 1 1 N 1 3 99 R U p power supply z NF Es V M OO 4 e 2 E 4 O5 6 T w x Sec Fuse 1 Y ONO CN2 Sp L i 5 2 2 mm min z BUM SN Class 3 ground O ox to 100 9 or less Ground plate vest 1 1 Thick power line Control board Controller power supply Machine 8 5 mm2 ground 222201 ground Ground the motor s frame to the machine ground when the motor is on a movable shaft Use a grounding plate for the frame ground for each Unit as shown in the illustration and ground to a single point Use ground lines with a minimum thickness of 3 5 mm and arrange the wiring so thatthe ground lines are as short as possible If no fuse breakers MCCB are installed at the top and the power supply line is wired from the lower duct use metal tubes for wiring and make sure that there is adequate distance between the input lines and the internal wiring If input and output lines are wired together noise resistance will decrease No fuse breakers MCCB surge absorbers and noise filters NF should be positioned near the input terminal block ground plate and I O lines should be isolated and wired using the shortest means possible Wire the noise filter as shown at the left in the follow
7. Monitor mode DATA Monitor no 4 Monitor data 1 Press the MODE SET Key to go into monitor mode 2 Using the Up and Down and Right and Left Keys set the monitor number 3 Press the DATA Key to display the monitor data 4 Press the DATA Key to return to the monitor number display 5 Press the MODE SET Key to move from monitor mode to alarm history display mode 4 5 Application Chapter 4 m Internal Status Bit Display Un 05 Un 06 Internal status is displayed by 7 segment bit lighting The bit number allocation is shown in the following diagram 13 B SN ig lt 14 sum ae Ems p 22 oes su E 16 17 18 19 20 Monitor Bit no Symbol Contents no E when the motor rotational speed reaches the speed Command val Encoder Z phase Lit when there is a signal Poll sensor U phase Poll sensor V phase Poll sensor W phase Lit when run command is ON Lit when the gain is reduced Lit when forward drive prohibit input is ON Lit when reverse drive prohibit input is ON Lit when clockwise command pulses are being input Lit when counterclockwise command pulses are being input ECRST Lit when the deviation counter reset input is ON 4 1 4 Checking Servomotor Parameters Cn 00 Set to 04 Servomotor parameters can be checked when system check mode Cn 00 is set to 04 Servomotor parame
8. 79 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Quickstart Tutorial Welcome and thank you for purchasing CitectHMI or CitectSCADA We would like your experience with the product to be a pleasant one so we have created this tutorial to help new users get familiar with some of the fundamental features of the product The tutorial is designed so that you can complete it in around one hour The tutorial is not intended as a substitute for attending a CitectHMI SCADA training course We encourage you to attend a training course to complete your basic training learn how to use time saving tools or go on to learn some of the more advanced features of the product This tutorial assumes that you have already successfully installed the CitectSCADA product on your computer You do not require a Citect license to complete this tutorial Repetition is an important part of learning or memorizing One way you can speed up your familiarization is to take a few minutes to click through all the menus in the of something don t be concerned just move on to the next one anyway You may not consciously remember everything product and briefly try and figure out what each item might be for if you can t make sense you see but it helps to set a framework for when you revisit these items in the tutorial and in this way you will remember them much better By completing this tutorial you will learn the following Creating a New Project Setting Up Commun
9. Ti Tin gt 2 5 us TiL 5 5 Specifications Chapter 5 m 100 VAC Input Servo ne Models OU to EC Directives x R amp eD UEPI2W Re8D UEPISW Continuous output current 0 P 3 1 A 3 8 A 4 8 A Momentary max output current 10 12 1 0 PWM frequency Cable length between motor and 20 m max driver Weight approximate Approx 0 9 kg Approx 1 2 kg Approx 1 5 kg Capacity Max pulse frequency 200 kpps Position loop gain 1 to 500 1 5 Electronic gear Electronic gear ratio setting range 0 01 G1 G2 100 G1 G2 1 to 65 535 Positioning completed 0 to 250 command units range Position acceleration de 0 to 64 0 ms The same setting is used for acceleration and deceleration celeration time constant Position command pulse TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V input see note Feed pulse and direction signal forward pulse and reverse pulse or 90 differen tial phase A and B phases signal set via parameter Pulse width See note Deviation counter reset TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V Sequence input 24 VDC 5 mA photocoupler input external power supply 12 to 24 VDC 30 mA min Position feedback output Z phase open collector output 30 VDC 20 mA 1 pulse revolution OFF on Z phase detection Sequence output Alarm output brake interlock positioning completion open coll
10. Alignment Effects Text Fill Color D Left Strikeout On Off A mM C Right Underline C Centre id Foreground m Cancel Apply Help In the Up Command edit box replace the current text with Toggle Pump 1 CMD Button Properties Appearance Movement Y Input Access You can also use F lt the Insert button action pea to lookup th Togole Pump_1_cmD T a Ys O lookup e lymma Toggle function Repeat paste it into a the Up 8 Command Logging e Log message 3 3 3 Repeat rate 500 E milliseconds Clear Property Cancel Apply Help 25 You can also use the reserved word TRUE instead of a 1 and FALSE instead of 0 TRUE and FALSE not case sensitive but upper case is a common convention used to indicate a reserved word 26 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Buttons continued We will now inhibit the Manual On Off button from working while the pump is in Auto mode and we ll add a tool tip on the way to explain this to operators Click onthe Access Tab at the top of the button form In the Tool tip edit box type Must be in Manual to turn on and off then click the Disable tab on the vertical tabs roperties Appearance Movement v Input v Access Identification S lt AN 207 E EN 2 Description A 2 i H Tool tip Must be in Manual to turn
11. Alarm history display mode 0 d Error one time before page 4 11 ES 9 Error ten time before Operation Chapter 3 3 4 Initial Settings Setup Parameters Setup parameters are parameters that are essential for starting up the system They clude I O signal function changes selection of processing for momentary stops and er rors command pulse modes and so on Set them to match the user system Once the parameters have been set they become effective when the power supply is turned on again after having been turned off Check to see that the LED display has gone off 3 4 1 Setting and Checking Setup Parameters Cn 01 02 m Displaying Setup Parameters There are two setup parameters No 1 Cn 01 and No 2 Cn 02 To display the contents of setup parameters execute the following key operations 1 To go into settings mode cn 00 press the MODE SET Key 2 To display the setup parameter number cn 01 orcn 02 press the Up and Down keys 3 To display the contents of the setup parameter press the DATA key To display the setting of setup parameter No 2 press the Up Key twice at step 2 before pressing the DATA Key The contents of the setup parameters are displayed as follows EC 8 6 4 2 0 11 li 11 lI BIENS 11 l lI 11 e F d b d 595 E I e Bit no to be set In the leftmo
12. Encoder method Optical incremental encoder Number of output pulses A B phase 1 024 pulses revolution Z phase 1 pulse revolution Power supply voltage 5 VDC 5 Power supply current DC 350 mA for load resistance of 220 Q Phase characteristics 90 43 2 Phase relationship For rotation in the CW direction A phase is advanced by 90 compared to B phase Maximum rotational speed 4500 r min Maximum response frequency 76 8 kHz Output signals A B B S S Output impedance Conforming to EIA RS 422A Output based on AM26LS31CN or equivalent Serial communications data Z phase poll sensor U V W phase Serial communications method Combination communications method based on A B and S phases 5 27 Specifications Chapter 5 5 3 Cable Specifications 5 3 1 Controller Connecting Cable m Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit Cables e Types of Cable Length L Outer diameter of sheath R88A CTU001N 1 9 9 dia R88A CTUOO2AN 2 e Connection Configuration XW2B 40F5 P Connector Terminal Conversion Unit OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver 5 28
13. Electronic Gear Chapter 3 section 3 5 3 1 Magnetic and Dynamic brakes Chapter 3 section 3 5 4 1 B a Trial Operation and Adjustment DIGITAL INNOVATION Trial Operation Chapter 3 section 3 6 1 Auto tuning Chapter 3 section 3 7 1 OMNUC U is a series of fully P software eohtrolled AC Esto Manually Adjusting Gain Chapter 3 section 3 7 2 drivers built on advanced OM RON software servo technol Troubleshooting and Remedies ogy It provides high perfor 1 Using Displays Chapter 4 section 4 1 mance a sensitive man ma Protective and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 section 4 2 chine interface and economy 3 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 section 4 3 U Series OMNUC U series UE Model AC Servo Driver E P Cable Specifications Chapter 5 5 3 Encoder B signals 02 Power signals Driver Specifications Chapter 5 5 1 Motor Specifications Chapter 5 5 2 Terminal Block Wiring 4 Chapter 2 2 2 3 o EET OMNUC U series UE Model AC Servomotor 3 000 r m 100 to 750 W With incremental encoder Parameter Units Operation Method Chapter 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 E A 1 2 1 2 System Configuration a n cir we OA ah eked a e eeepc e ees 1 4 1 3 Servo Driver Nomenclatur
14. 24 VDC Note 1 The XB contact is used to turn the electromagnetic brake on and off Use mode 2 for origin search When only a single axis is used short circuit the unused axis CW limit and CCW limit to the common terminal The open terminal must be left unconnected 0 V and common terminals are connected internally The suitable crimp terminal is R1 25 3 round or fork type OS XW2B omnon XW2B XW2B 20J6 3B 1 side Servo side 135 5 31 Two 3 5 dia holes Terminal block 20 P 2 ith rot Connection to Terminal Block with rotary cover The terminal signal name varies with the servo driver Refer to the Operation Manual of the servo driver in use 44 3 1 74 Identify the servo driver in use by writing the name on the terminal nameplates provided Affix the nameplate to the terminal cover 1 81 Note The terminal block has a terminal pitch of 7 62 mm Connection to Position Control PLC CQM1 CPU43 EV1 for 1 or 2 Axis Control Note 1 When this signal is input the output pulses of the CQM1 can be input to the high speed counters directly 2 Input this signal output to the CQM1 input modules 3 The XB contact is used to turn the electro magnetic brake on and off 4 Phase Z is an open collector output 5 The open terminal must be left uncon see see lo note 1 note 1 nected 6 OV and common terminals are connected
15. 1 3 10 Operation Chapter 3 m Parameter 2 Cn 02 setting Reverse rotation mode CCW direction i is taken as forward rotation M Pr e Not used Not used Command pulse mode 4 0 0 Feed pulse Forward reverse signal Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 90 phase difference A B phase signal 1X 90 phase difference A B phase signal 2X 90 phase difference A B phase signal 4X Not used Not used j o Deviation counter clear 8 S j ua 7 Torque command fite A LE d 0 Notused 0 Parameter Unit monitor AA E 0 Noted Note 1 Do not change the settings of bits 1 2 6 through 9 b d or F of setup parameter 2 Cn 02 Note 2 These parameters become effective only after power is reset Confirm that the indicators go out before turning power back on Check to see that the LED display has gone off 3 4 3 Important Setup Parameters Cn 01 and Cn 02 This section explains the particularly important setup parameters If these parameters aren t set proper ly the motor might not operate or might operate unpredictably Set these parameters appropriately for the system being used m Command Pulses in Position Control Bits 3 4 and 5 of Cn 02 specify the kind of command pulse mode used for position control as shown in the following table Cn 02 bit 3 Selected
16. 3596 to 8596 RH with no condensation Storage ambient humidity 3596 to 85 RH with no condensation Storage and operating No corrosive gasses atmosphere Vibration resistance 4 9 m s 0 5 G max Acceleration 19 6 m s 2 G max Impact resistance m Performance Specifications R88A PRO2U Hand held R88A PROS3U Mounted Accessory cable 1 000 mm Connected by connectors Accessory connectors 7910 7500SC 10 pins D sub connector 9 pins Display 7 segment LED 5 digits External dimensions Commu nications specifica tions Standard Communications method Baud rate Start bits Data Parity Stop bits Errors detected by Parameter Unit 5 38 63 x 135 x 18 5 W x H x D RS 232C Asynchronous ASYNC 2 400 bps 1 bit 8 bits None 1 bit 54 x 57 5 x 15 W x H x D RS 422A Display CPF00 Cannot transmit even after 5 seconds elapsed since power supply was turned on CPF01 error or faulty reception data has occurred for five consecutive times or a time overrun 1 s has occurred for three consecutive times Specifications Chapter 5 5 5 Regeneration Unit Specifications m R88A RGO8UA Regeneration Unit e General Specifications em Operating ambient temperature O C to 55 Storage ambient temperature 10 C to 75 C Operating ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH with no condensation Stora
17. A2 82 Connector AEN Position Control Servo Terminal Module side Block side MR 34LF XG4M 3430 T Honda Tsushin Kogyo dd w e m Crimp terminal 10 34 XW2B XW2B omnon XW2B For CQM1 Use Wiring Diagram XW2Z J A3 XW2Z J A3 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 XW2B 20J6 3B XM2D 1501 XG4M 1630 a Connector Position Control Servo Terminal PLC CPU side Block side m Hood cover LP 2 1 XM2D 1501 Socket XG4M 1630 T XM2S 1511 Hood For U Series Servo Driver and Motion Contorl Terminal Block XW2Z 4 1 Wiring Diagram XW2Z J B1 XW2Z J B 5 R88D UPO00O0 XW2B 1J6 L B R88D UPO00 XW2B 1J6 L B Half pitch XG4M 2030 Half pitch XG4M 2030 connector with 36 connector with 36 Connector Servo Driver side Servo Terminal Block side 20 19 a 1 10136 3000VE Plug XG4M 2030 T 10336 52A0 008 Hood both Sumitomo 3M 11 XW2B Precautions B WIRING The open terminal must be left unconnected 0 V and common terminals are connected internally Do not wire the Servo Terminal Block while power is supplied to the unit or the terminals may be short circuited with the cable
18. Creating Graphics Pages Creating Colors CitectSCADA supports True Colors This allows far greater flexibility when importing images as well as managing colors quickly and easily The default palette contains 128 commonly used colors however this does not restrict the number of colors you can actually use in your project Double click on the Pump 1 text on your graphics page to open the Text Properties form again Click on the Foreground color Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Creating Colors continued Click on Edit Another color form will display allowing you to customize the color either using the mouse or by entering the RBG indices for specific values Edit Favorite Colors s ROA AA AA 4 el Add Replace Clear Flashing Hue 209 Red 217 5 Lum 236 Green 236 gt Name Color153 Flashing colors c Sat 255 4 Blue 255 Cancel Help You can use a variety of options in this color editing dialog to adjust the color to any of the 32 million true colors available provided your computer supports 32bit colors In our case we will simply Slide the Shading Cursor on the right hand side up to a very pale shade then click OK to finish and transfer the new color to your graphics object Once you are satisfied with the color of your text we will add a 3D Effect of Black Shadowing using the 3D Effects tab on the right side of the Text Propert
19. 24 Open 53 Feedback Timing Chart Limit switches S1 and S2 Starter switch K3 NC K3 NO K1 and K2 NC K1 and K2 NO K4 and K5 4 5 1 and 2 1 2 61 Limit switch S2 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanism D4D and D4B S3 Starter switch KM1 and 2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor OMRON G9S G9S 24 VDC WITH 2 CHANNEL LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Timing Chart Limit switches S1 and S2 Starter switch S3 Feedback loop K3 NC KM1 5 2 NO K1 and K2 NO K1 and K2 NO Open K4 and K5 NO K4 and K5 NO 1 7 1 2 OFF delay NO timer 7 KM1 2 Operation instruction Motor rotation OFF delay time 51 Limit switch S2 Safety Limit Switch Operation with positive opening mechanism instruction D4D and D4B Motor controle S3 Starter switch KM1 and KM2 Magnet Contactor
20. 3 5 Forward rotation Reverse rotation Display example 2 5 rotation Forward rotation Note To monitor the speed feedback value press the MODE SET Key and go into monitor mode un 00 Then press the DATA Key If there is an error refer to Chapter 4 Application and take the necessary countermeasures Operation Chapter 3 3 3 Using Parameter Units The key operations for the Hand held R88A PR02U Parameter Unit and the Mounted R88A PR03U Parameter Unit vary depending on the functions used 3 3 1 Parameter Unit Keys and Functions Hand held Mounted Parameter Unit Parameter Unit R88A PR02U R88A PR03U Alarm reset omRon R88A PROSU Mode switching Data memory Servo ON OFF during jog op erations Switching between parameter display and data display data memory Increments parameter num bers and data values Zu Zu lt ag Decrements parameter num bers and data values Left shift for operation digits Right shift for operation digits 8 3 3 2 Modes and Changing Modes Modes OMNUC U series AC Servo Drivers have four operating modes as described in the following table For example the Settings Mode is used to set parameters Mode Function Status display mode Bit display indica
21. Type Font Style Size zz 3 6 Text Arial Regular 8 C Symbol C Target Arial Black E Batang a 2 BatangChe A XP Style Browallia New Custom Fill Color BrowalliaUPC Calibri mala Alignment Effects Text Fill Color Dowr Left Strikeout Auto n E C Right underline C Centre x Foreground Cancel Apply Help Double Click on the word Manual in the Text edit box replace the text with Auto Click OK when finished We now have two buttons that will set the control mode of the pump to Auto or Manual Next we need a control to turn the pump on and off Instead of using two buttons one for on and another for off this time we ll use just one button 24 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Buttons continued Make a copy of the Auto Button hold the Ctrl key then click and drag the Auto Button to create a a new location Double Click the new button to access its animation properties then change the button Text to read On Off Click on the Input tab when finished Button Properties Appearance Movement Y Access 1 Font Style Size s tc 5 4 Text Arial Regular 8 Symbol E A C Target Arial Black Italic a u lt Batang fa Bold 10 4 2 BatangChe Bold Italic 11 XP Style Browallia New 12 E Custom Fill Color BrowalliaUPC 14 Calibri 16 Il Color Up 2565
22. X Analog Digital P Alarm Pane Display refresh rate 1000 miliseconds Data request rate 1000 54 milliseconds Interpolation is the manner in which the display shows links between sample points Straight means that it draws a line directly between two points Stepped means it holds the last sample value until it reaches the time of the new sample and then steps to the new value Stepped interpolation is a more accurate indication of Number of samples 300 the samples that Citect Locking SCADA has recorded Lock pens Administration Privilege level Expand the tree to Pane 1 and modify the background color You can select from the color palette or create new palette items by entering the Red Green and Blue values directly In this case enter 250 250 190 for Red Green and Blue respectively then click Add to Custom Colors Select this new color and click OK to record the change Click Apply to see the effect on your Process Analyst view Now select Pump 1 Speed in RPM beneath Pane 1 in the properties tree Appearance Gridines Axis Quality Connection Cursor Label gt Pump 1 moi General E Default Settings All pens Linecoo My Line width a E pared Stacked 75 Interpolation Steppe Digital P Alarm m Pane owes Change the line color to bright red and the width to 2 and the interpolation from Straight to
23. bcm Grown 5 v DG k a El Cu esu ici OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 10 2 COMIH CTB41 2 5 Ejemplo TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH El siguiente ejemplo muestra como se puede utilizar Contador de Alta Velocidad 1 en la Tarjeta Opcional CQM1H CTB41 montada en el Slot 2 Se va a realizar una comparaci n por valores coincidentes para que se pongan a ON los bits correspondientes de salida internos y externos en funci n del PV del contador EI Bit de Reset se mantiene a ON en el programa para que el PV del contador se resetee con la se al de Fase Z despu s de que se alcance el ltimo valor objeto de comparaci n Antes de ejecutar el programa se tiene que configurar el tal y como se muestra debajo teniendo que apagar y encender o pasar de PROGRAM a MONITOR el PLC para que se habilite la nueva configuraci n en el DM661 1 DM 6611 0001 Salidas 1 a 4 en modo PNP y el PV de los contadores 1 a 4 se almacenar en 8 D gitos BCD DM 6643 0003 Contador de Alta Velocidad 1 Frecuencia de 50KHz Modo Lineal Reset por Fase Z Software Modo Adelante Atr s Cuando el PV alcance el valor de 2500 IR 05000 se pondr a ON y la Salida Externa 1 se pondr a ON Cuando el PV alcance el valor de 7500 IR 05001 se pondr a ON y la Salida Externa 2 se pondr a ON Cuando el PV alcance el valor de 10000 IR 05002 se pondr a ON y la Salida Externa 3 se pondr a ON Courr
24. 205 6005 XW2Z 200T 2 NT21 31 631 XW2Z 500T 2 Recommended Cable Deer Cr 1W CN11 2 CIF01 E I I I I I I I I I I Dina EL L_ OO I Peripheral Port Cable Solutions for Omron PLCs Operator Interface Terminals and CPM2B PLC 10 eg ET ET CS1W CN118 C200H CN__0 EU I I es NT31C CN__0 EU for NT31C Port B only I I I I Peripheral Port I I ss To _ Serial Port I TD Il Ll Ji NT20S 6005 XW2Z 200T 2 NT21 31 631 HE XW2Z 500T 2 Recommended Cable Operator Interface Terminals and COM1H PLC C200H CN__0 EU 00 02 0 A d NT31C CN__0 EU for NT31C Port B only Serial A Expansion Port I Serial Port i I NT11S j i 1 XW2Z 200T 2 205 6005 A XW2Z 500T 2 NT21 31 631 Cable Solutions for Omron PLCs Operator Interface Terminals and CJ1 PLC RS232C Pot Serial Modules C200H CN__0 EU NT31C CN__0 EU for NT31C Port B only e m NT11S NT20S 600S NT21 31 631 CJ1 Operator Interface Terminals and CS1 PLC DE fl 1 W CN118 I RS232 i RS232C Serial I Serial 12 a Modules Board C200H CN__0 EU NT31C CN__0 EU for NT31C
25. 24 G9S 321 T01 AC24 120 VAC G9S 321 T01 AC120 240 VAG G9S 321 T01 AC240 105 24 VDC G9S 321 T10 DC24 24 VAC G9S 321 T10 AC24 120 VAC G9S 321 T10 AC120 240 VAG G9S 321 T10 AC240 30s 24 VDC G9S 321 T30 DC24 24 VAC G9S 321 T30 AC24 120 VAC G9S 321 T30 AC120 240 VAG G9S 321 T30 AC240 Note Each model has an SPST NC auxiliary contact Specifications B RATINGS Controller Block Part number Rated voltage Rated current Rated power consumption 995 2001 24 VDC 66 20 1 6 W 695 2002 999 301 24 VDC 62 5 mA 20 Approx 1 5 W 24 VAC 125 mA 20 Approx 3 VA 60 Hz 120 VAC 25 mA 20 240 VAC 12 5 mA 20 G9S 501 24 VDC 127 mA 20 Approx 3 W 24 VAC 229 2 mA 20 Approx 5 5 VA 60 Hz 120 VAC 45 8 mA 20 240 VAC 22 9 mA 20 G9S 321 T 24 VDC 150 mA 20 Approx 3 6 W 24 VAC 256 2 mA 20 Approx 6 1 VA 60 Hz 120 VAC 50 8 mA 20 240 VAC 25 4 mA 20 Note The above ratings are at an ambient temperature of 23 C G9S omnon G9S Contact Part number G9S 301 G9S 2001 G9S 501 G9S 2002 G9S 321 T Rated load 3 A at 240 VAC See Note at 240 VAC 0 4 coso 0 4 15 947 5 1 3 at 240 VAC cos 0 3 6 050 operations Table 4 DC13 947 5 1 1 A at 24 VDC L R 100 ms 6 050 operations Table 4 Rated carry current 5A Max switching voltage 250 VAC 24 VDC Max
26. Deceleration torque kgf cm t4 to Deceleration time s Note There is some loss due to winding resistance so the actual regenerative energy will be approxi mately 90 of the figure derived by the formula The maximum regenerative energy for the Servo Driver s internal capacitors only can be found by means of the following formula Eg Egi Ego J Eg is the larger of Egy and Ego When regenerative energy is absorbed at the Servo Driver only Eg must not exceed the amount of re generative energy that can be absorbed at the Servo Driver In addition the average regenerative pow er when a Regeneration Unit is connected can be found by means of the following formula P Egi Eg2 T W T Operation cycle s Eg must not exceed the maximum regeneration absorption capacity of the Servo Driver when only the Servo Driver is used to absorb regenerative energy When a Regeneration Unit is connected the aver age regenerative power Pi must not exceed the regeneration processing power of the Regeneration Unit Connect an external regeneration resistor when the regeneration processing power of the Regenera tion Unit 12 W is exceeded Refer to 3 8 3 Absorption of Regenerative Energy with the External Re generation Resistor for details on external regeneration resistors 3 28 Operation Chapter 3 m Vertical Axle Motor operation Falling Motor output torque Note In the output torque graph when the rotati
27. Introduction Chapter 1 1 4 Directives and Applicable Models m EC Directives ECDirecive Product Directive Remas Low voltage Servo Driver EN61010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use AC Servomotor IEC34 1 5 8 9 Rotating electrical machines AC Servo Driver EN55011 class A group 1 Limits and methods of measurement AC Servomotor of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment EN50082 2 Electromagnetic compatibility generic immunity standard Part 2 Industrial environment Note Installation under the conditions specified in 2 3 3 Wiring Products Conforming to EMC Direc tives is required to conform to EMC Directives m Applicable Models Power supply Output capacity AC Servo Drivers AC Servomotors With incremental encoder 200 VAC 100W R88D UEP04V R88M UE10030V S1 200W R88D UEPO8V R88M UE20030V S1 100 VAC Note The above models with brakes are also applicable Change the suffix to BS1 for models with brakes 1 6 Chapter 2 System Design and Installation 2 1 Installation 2 2 Wiring Non conforming Products 2 3 Wiring Products Conforming to EC Directives System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Precautions N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N
28. Repeat rate 500 s milliseconds Clear Property Cancel Help Save your page Switch to the Citect Editor and compile your project Run your project Once the project is running open MyPage and click on the Manual button Instead of immediately changing the pump s mode to manual Citect will display an electronic signature verification form Signature Verification Click on the Verify button Operation Writing value 1 to tag Pump_1_Mode This operation requires approval from all the following people 1 kernel Approval is pending verification of the above users Cancel Addendum Security Validation continued 79 80 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 A new verification form is displayed prompting for the kernel user s password This will display even if the kernel user is already logged in Type in the kernel user s password citect then Click OK User Name kernel Password I Enter your password to approve this operation Cancel A final verification form is displayed allowing the user to verify that the action should be performed Click Approve The pump mode will now be changed to Manual Operation Writing value 1 to tag Pump_1_Mode This operation requires approval from all the following people 1 kernel Verified All users verified This operation can now be approved Further information on e
29. Sequence output Alarm output brake interlock positioning completion open collector outputs 30 VDC 50 mA External regeneration processing Required for regeneration of more than 30 times the Required for regeneration motor s rotor inertia of more than 20 times the motor s rotor inertia Protective functions Overcurrent grounding overload overvoltage overspeeding runaway protection transmission errors encoder errors deviation counter overflow Note The input pulse width must be meet the following conditions H Ti Tin gt 2 5 us TiL 5 4 Specifications Chapter 5 m 200 VAC Input Servo Drivers Models Conforming to EC Directives R88D R88D R88D R88D UEP04V UEP08V UEP12V UEP20V Continuous output current OP Momentary max output current 0 P 11 3 A 19 7 A Input power supply Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V 50 60 Hz Control method All digital servo Speed feedback Optical encoder 1 024 pulses revolution Applicable load inertia Maximum of 30 times motor s ro Maximum of 20 times motor s ro tor inertia tor inertia nverter method PWM method based on IGBT PWM frequency 11 kHz 7 8 kHz Applicable Servomotor R88M R88M R88M R88M UE10030V S1 0 20030 61 0 40030 61 UE75030V S1 Applicable Servomotor wattage 750W Cable length between motor and driver 20 m max Weight approximate Approx 0 9 kg Approx 1 2 kg Approx 1 5 kg Capacity Maximum pulse frequency 200
30. display mode If POT and NOT are not being used set Cn 01 bit nos 2 and 3 to 1 The deviation counter reset Check the deviation counter Turn OFF the ECRST sig input ECRST is ON reset signal in monitor mode nal internal status bit display Correct the wiring An error occurred with the Check the RESET signal s Turn the RESET signal OFF RESET signal ON ON and OFF by means of and take measures the monitor mode according to the alarm display The setting for the command Check positioner s Set according to the pulse mode is not correct command pulse type and controller command pulse Cn 02 bits 3 4 5 Driver s command pulse type mode The motor operates mo The Servomotor power lines Check the Servomotor pow Correct the wiring mentarily but then it does or encoder lines are wired er line U V and W phases not operate incorrectly and the encoder line wiring Servomotor operation is The Servomotor power lines Check the Servomotor pow Correct the wiring unstable or encoder lines are wired er line U V and W phases incorrectly and the encoder line wiring There are eccentricities or Check the machinery Adjust the machinery looseness in the coupling Try operating the Servo connecting the Servomotor motor without a load shaft and the mechanical system or there are load torque fluctuations according to how the pulley gears are engaging Gain is wrong Use a
31. 00 System check mode Press the DATA Key to display the setting of Cn 00 Using the Up and Down Keys set the parameter to 02 Alarm history clear Press the MODE SET Key to clear the alarm history data Press the DATA Key to return to the settings mode NO WBN 4 11 Application Chapter 4 4 3 Troubleshooting When an error occurs check the error contents by means of the operating status and alarm display investigate the cause and apply the appropriate countermeasures m Error Diagnosis by Means of Operating Status Symptom Probable cause Wemsiocheck Countermeasures The power supply indicator Power supply lines are in Check the power supply Correct the power supply PWR does not light even correctly wired voltage Correct the wiring when the power supply is Check the power supply turned on lines The motor does not oper The RUN signal is OFF Check the RUN signals ON Input the RUN signal ate even when command when Cn 01 bit no 0 is 0 and OFF by means of the Correct the wiring pulses are input No monitor mode alarm is output The correspondence be Check the models Combine models that corre tween the Servo Driver and spond correctly the Servomotor is incorrect The POT and NOT signals Check whether POT and Turn ON the POT and are OFF when Cn 01 bit NOT are displayed in status NOT signals nos 2 and 0
32. 3 23 Operation Chapter 3 e Gain Adjustment Standards The following table shows reference values for gain adjustment Adjustments can be made quickly if these values are used as standards Make the initial gain setting based on the load inertia Load inertia Speed loop gain Speed loop Position loop gain Comments factor Cn 04 Hz integration constant 1 1 5 Cn 05 ms 1 80 60 High rigidity 40 Factory setting 40 40 20 Moderate rigidity 10 Low rigidity m Adjustment Parameters e Adjusting Speed Loop Gain Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range Cn 04 Speed loop gain 80 1 to Adjusts the speed loop response 2 000 As the gain is increased the servo rigidity is strengthened The greater the inertia rate the higher this is set If the gain is set too high oscillation will occur When the speed loop gain is manipulated the response is as shown in the diagram below When speed loop gain is high Oscillates when gain is too high Motor speed speed monitor 7 When speed loop gain is low 3 24 Operation Chapter 3 e Adjusting the Speed Loop Integration Time Constant Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range Cn 05 Speed loop integra Speed loop integration constant tion constant As the constant is increased the response is shortened and the resiliency toward ex ternal force is weakened If it is s
33. 400 W and 750 W m Motor Output Capacity AC Servomotors with the following output capacities are available For 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V single phase 50 60 Hz Input 100 W 200 W 400 W and 750 W For 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 V single phase 50 60 Hz Input 100 W 200 W and 300 W Note 1 Each Servomotor is available with or without a brake Note 2 Each motor shaft has a straight axis with a key m EC Directives CE Markings AC Servomotor and Servo Drivers that conform to EC low voltage and EMC directives are now available These provide the same performance and functions as the rest of the U Series UE Mod els and will aid in obtaining specifications m Control Functions Controls the position and speed of the Servomotor very precisely with pulse train input signals Any one of the following 3 pulse trains can be selected forward reverse pulses feed pulses directional signals or 90 differential phase A B phases signals m Auto tuning The gain can be adjusted automatically when the responsiveness has been selected to match the rigidity of the mechanical system The auto tuning feature automatically finds the optimum adjust ment to match the load with no need for difficult operations m Monitor Displays the driver s operating status on the Parameter Unit The following items can be monitored speed feedback torque commands number of pulses from the U phase edge electrical angle internal status bit display
34. Ball screw center line Recommended Coupling Oldham coupling Myghty Co Ltd For spur gears an extremely large radial load may be applied depending on the gear precision Use spur gears with a high degree of accuracy for exam ple JIS class 2 normal line pitch error of 6 um max Backlash for a pitch circle diameter of 50 mm If the gear preci sion is not adequate allow backlash to ensure that no radial load is placed on the motor shaft Adjust backlash by adjusting the distance between shafts lt 2 16 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Bevel gears will cause a load to be applied in the thrust direction depending on the structural preci sion the gear precision and temperature changes Provide appropriate backlash or take other mea sures to ensure that no thrust load is applied which exceeds specifications Do not put rubber packing on the flange surface If Make moveable the flange is mounted with rubber packing the motor flange may separate due to the tightening strength When connecting to a V belt or timing belt consult the maker for belt selection and tension A radial load twice the belt tension will be placed on the motor shaft Do not allow a radial load exceeding specifications to be placed on the motor shaft due to belt tension If an excessive radial load is ap plied the motor shaft may be damaged Set upthe structure so thatthe radialload can be
35. Besure that no gaps are created when installing the control panel as can be cause by distortion when tightening screws Be sure there are not any electrically conductive parts that are not in electrical contact Ground all Units mounted in the control panel to the panel case e Cover Structure Use a metal cover Use a water proof structure as shown in the following diagram and be sure there are no gaps Use electrically conductive packing between the cover and the case as shown in the following dia gram Remove the coating the contact points of the packing or mask the contact points when coat ing to ensure electrical conductivity 2 33 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Besurethat no gaps are created when installing the cover as can be cause by distortion when tighten ing screws Case Cover Control panel Oil proof Conductive packing packing Oil proof packing Conductive packing BREA Case inside Selecting Components e No fuse Breakers MCCB When selecting no fuse breakers take into consideration the maximum output current and the inrush current The momentary maximum output for a servo system is approximately three times that of the rated output and a maximum output of three seconds can be executed Therefore select no fuse breakers with an operating time of at least five seconds at 300 of the rated maximum output General purpose and low spee
36. Entrada Anal gica 2 Entrada de Tensi n Entrada Anal gica 2 com n ka de tensi n entrada de corriente V1 Entrada Anal gica 1 com n entrada de EE tensi n entrada de corriente 9 Jia 7 Entrada Anal gica 4 entrada de corriente No utilizar No utilizar Entrada Anal gica 1 entrada de corriente CN2 Salidas Anal gicas Situaci n de los Pines Nede Pin Nombre Funci n No utilizado 2 jN No utilizado Eum Salida ae 2 com n salida de corriente ELE Salida E 2 com n salida de tensi n No utilizado 8 NO utilizado Salida rad 1 com n salida de corriente Salida EE 1 com n salida de tensi n 9 JNoulizado j OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 23 6 COMIH MAB42 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 6 5 Especificaciones de las Entradas Anal gicas Elemento Especificaci n de Puntos 4 Entradas Entrada Rangos de la Se al de 10 10 0 a 20 mA Entrada 0a10V 0a5V Registros en los que se Entrada Anal gica 1 IR 232 almacenan las entradas Entrada Anal gica 2 IR 233 anal gicas Entrada Anal gica 3 IR 234 Entrada Anal gica 4 IR 235 Tiempo de Conversi n 1 7 ms m x punto A D Dato de Salida de la Dato de 12 bits en Binario Dato de 12 bits en Binario Conversi n A D 10 a 10 V F800 a 07FF Hex 0 a 20 mA 0000 a OFFF en 0a10V 0a5V 000
37. IEC664 1 DIN VDE 0110 89 Dielectric strength 2 500 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between control circuit and the safety and auxiliary circuits between the safety circuits and auxiliary circuits and between safety circuits Vibration Mechanical 10 to 55 Hz 0 75 mm double amplitude resistance IEC68 2 6 Electrical 10 to 55 Hz 0 5 mm double amplitude Shock resistance Mechanical 300 m s approx 30G for 11 ms 1EC68 2 27 Electrical 50 m s approx 5G for 11 ms Minimum applicable load P standard reference value 24 VDC 50 mA Ambient Operating 25 C to 55 13 F to 131 F temperature Storage 25 C to 55 13 F to 131 F Relative humidity Operating 38 to 85 RH Storage 38 to 85 RH Enclosure rating Terminals IP20 IEC529 Enclosure IP40 Terminal tightening torque 10 kgf cm 0 98 N m Weight See Note Approx 180 g Approx 365 g Approx 550 g Approx 580 g Approved standards UL508 CSA22 2 No 14 EN954 1 EN60204 1 EMC EMS EN55011 group 1 class EN50082 2 Note These weights are for DC models AC models are 200 g heavier OMRON G9S G9S B LIFE EXPECTANCY Mechanical life 1 000 000 operations min with a switching frequency of approx 1 800 operations h Electrical life 100 000 operations min at the rated load with a switching frequency of approx 1 800 operations h Life Ex
38. M 3 phase motor G9S omnon G9S G9S 301 24 VDC WITH 2 CHANNEL EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH INPUT Feedback 51 ul 2 EN loop 7 1 IN ry OUT KM3 _ Timing Chart Emergency stop switch 51 Starter switch 52 NC NO K1 2 NO K1 and K2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO PC input PC output KM3 S1 Emergency stop switch S2 Starter switch KM1 and 2 Magnet Contactor G3J Solid state Contactor M 3 phase motor G9S 501 AC WITH SINGLE CHANNEL EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH INPUT 52 Feedback loop KM1 2 10 Timing Chart Emergency stop switch S1 Starter switch 52 K1 K2 NC K1 and K2 NO K4 and K5 NC K4 and K5 NO KM1 and KM2 NC KM1 and KM2 NO S1 Emergency stop switch S2 Starter switch KM1 and KM2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor G9S omnon G9S G9S 321 TH 24 VDC WITH SINGLE CHANNEL LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Timing Chart
39. Maximum output current 50 mA M OGND Z phase output 20 mA max To other output circuits Di Diode for preventing surge voltage Use speed diodes e Control Output Sequence Power supply input ON RT OFF Approx 2s DU Alarm output ON _ ALM OFF Positioning completed output ON INP OFF Brake interlock output ON BKIR OFF 25to35ms i Run command input RUN OFF Alarm resetinput RESET opp t Approx 105 R88D UEP04H UEP08H UEP12H R88D UEP10L UEP12L R88D UEP04V UEP08V UEP12V R88D UEP10W UEP12W Approx 15 s R88D UEP20H UEP15L R88D UEP20V UEP15W e Brake Interlock 7 BKIR This outputs the external brake timing signal set in Cn 12 Refer to 3 5 4 Brake Interlock For Motors with Brakes for details e Positioning Completed Output 8 INP This output is turned ON when the pulse count remaining on the deviation counter is less than the posi tioning completed range set in user parameter Cn 1b If the command speed is low and the positioning completed range is large the positioning completed output will remain ON 5 14 Specifications Chapter 5 e Alarm Output Alarm Output Ground 34 35 ALM ALMCOM When the Servo Driver detects an error outputs are turned OFF At that time an alarm code see below is output according to the contents of the error This output is OFF atthe time of powering up and turns ON when the power up processing is compl
40. Open collector Input When connected with open collector output insert a current limit resistor as shown below Controller side Servo Driver side Vcc R A 220 Qu es fa nA V S 17 aye Ji Hi When Vcc 5 V R 0 lt When Vcc 12 V R 750 Q When Vcc 24 V R 1 6 kQ Deviation Counter Reset 5 6 ECRST ECRST The contents of the deviation counter will be reset and the position loop will be disabled when the devi ation counter reset signal turns ON The deviation counter reset signal must be input for at least 20 us to be effective The counter or may not be reset if the input signal is less than 20 us The setting of Cn 02 bit No A determines whether setting is performed the high signal level or on the rising edge of the signal Feed Pulse Reverse Pulse 90 Differential Pulse A Phase CN1 1 PULS CW A Feed Pulse Reverse Pulse 90 Differential Pulse A Phase 1 2 PULS CW A Direction Signal Forward Pulse 90 Differential Pulse B Phase CN1 3 SIGN CCW B Direction Signal Forward Pulse 90 Differential Pulse B Phase CN1 4 SIGN CCW B The functions of the above pulses depend on the command pulse mode Positive command pulse logic is used Command Pulse Mode Cn 02 bit nos 5 4 3 Cn 02 bit nos 5 4 3 0 0 0 Feed pulses and direction signal Cn 02 bit nos 5 4 0 0 1 Forward pulse and reverse pulse factory default Cn 02 bit nos
41. ae ES Le LIN i qp y fae Iun d Equals Flog EUM piema D utr noe Ecquale Flag OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 12 3 CQM1H PLB21 3 21 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL CQM1H PLB21 Tarjeta de E S de pulsas Conector Entrada de pulsos 1 Salida de pulsos 1 Conector CN2 Entrada de pulsos 2 Salida de pulsos 2 La Tarjeta Opcional de E S de Pulsos CQM1H PLB21 dispone de 2 Entradas de Pulsos y 2 Salidas de Pulsos La Tarjeta Opcional CQM1H PLB21 es exactamente igual que los puertos de Entrada Salida CN1 y CN2 de pulsos que incorporaba el 1 CPU43 Se comporta del mismo modo se programa y pone en marcha de la misma forma y tienen las mismas caracter sticas 3 1 Slot en el que se puede montar Esta tarjeta s lo se puede montar en el Slot 2 slot derecho de la CPU por tanto s lo se puede montar 1 Tarjeta por CPU 3 2 Entradas de Pulsos 1 y 2 Las Entradas de Pulsos 1 y 2 se pueden utilizar como Contadores de Alta Velocidad para contar entradas de pulsos de hasta 50 KHz para sefiales de fase simple 25 KHz para fase diferencial Los procesos de interrupci n se pueden desarrollar teniendo en cuenta el PV de los contadores Modo de Entrada Est n disponibles los tres modos de entrada siguientes e Modo de Fase Diferencial 4x e Modo Pulso y Direcci n e Modo Adelante Atr s
42. command pulse s speed position deviation and the input pulse counter m Jog Operation Forward Reverse motor operation can be controlled from the Parameter Unit 1 2 Introduction Chapter 1 m Electronic Gear Function The number of pulses used to rotate the motor is calculated by multiplying the number of command pulses by the electronic gear ratio This function is useful in the following kinds of cases When you want to finely adjust the position and speed of two lines that need to be synchronized When you want to increase the control pulse frequency of a controller with a low pulse frequency When you want to set the movement pulse to a certain amount such as 0 01 mm pulse The electronic gear ratio is set with parameters G1 and G2 G1 numerator and G2 denominator The setting range for parameters G1 and G2 is 1 to 65 535 The setting range for the gear ratio is 0 01 to 100 i e 0 01 G1 G2 100 m Pulse Smoothing Function Even high frequency commands can be executed smoothly by including acceleration deceleration in the command pulses The same setting is used for both the acceleration and deceleration times and the setting range is O to 64 ms m Reverse Mode Forward Reverse commands can be switched the parameters without changing the wiring to the motor or encoder m Brake Interlock Output Outputs atiming signal interlocked with the motor s ON OFF status and rotational speed The hold ing brak
43. ov B A 227 mA ZCOM R88A CRUCICICIC Origin input B 2 Encoder Cable Positionii leted i 9 ositioning completed input Pal INP A 24VIN Position proximity input 10L 4 B RUN t 12 A RESET CCW limit input Cal OGND To A ALMCOM CW limit input 18 FB External interrupt input 19 LA B FG i 20 A stop input B S General purpose Cable WH Note 1 Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to Units and the Servo Driver Note 2 Leave unused signal lines open and do not wire them Note 3 Use mode 2 for origin search Note 4 Use dedicated power supply 24 5 VDC for command pulse signals Note 5 ERB44 02 diodes by Fuji Electric or equivalent are recommended for surge absorption Note 6 Use the RUN signal to set whether the Servo can be turned ON OFF Note 7 Class 3 grounds must be to 100 or less Note 8 The Servo Relay Unit and Cables for the R88D UP cannot be used 6 2 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Connecting to SYSMAC C200H NC112 Position Control Unit with 24 VDC Power Supply
44. 5 20 Specifications Chapter 5 5 2 Servomotor Specifications 5 2 1 General Specifications item Specifications Operating ambient temperature 0 C to 40 Operating ambient humidity 2096 to 80 RH with no condensation Storage ambient temperature 10 C to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 20 to 85 RH with no condensation Storage and operating atmo No corrosive gasses sphere Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz in X Y and Z directions with 0 2 mm double amplitude acceleration 24 5 m s2 2 5 G max time coefficient 8 min 4 sweeps Impact resistance Acceleration 98 m s 10 G max in X Y and Z directions three times Between power line terminals and case 10 MQ min 500 VDC megger Between power line terminals and case 1 500 VAC for 1 min 10 mA max at 50 60 Hz JEC 2121 Insulation grade Type B JIS C4004 Totally enclosed self cooling Protective structure Non conforming Models IP 42 JEM1030 Models Conforming to EC Directives IP 44 IEC34 5 excluding shaft opening Cannot be used in environment with water soluble cutting fluids Vibration grade V 15 JEC2121 Mounting method Flange mounting Note 1 Vibration may be amplified due to sympathetic resonance of machinery so use the Servomotor Driver under conditions which will not exceed 19 6 m s 2 G over a long period of time Note 2 Theabove items reflect individual evaluation testing The results may differ u
45. Handy type R88A PR02U Mounted type R88A PR03U e Regeneration Unit Specification mo Regeneration processing current 8 A R88A RGOSUA e External Regeneration Resistor Specification Regeneration capacity 70 W 470 R88A RR22047S 6 7 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 e Encoder Cables on Y Mor Connectors at both ends e Power Cables on For standard Connector at one motors no brake end For motors with Connector at one bakes end e General purpose Control Cables Specification Model For general purpose 1m R88A CPU001S controllers connector at one end 2m R88A CPU002S e Connectors and Terminal Blocks Control cable connector R88A CNU01C Connector terminal block XW2B 40F5 P Connection cable for R88A CTUOO1N connector terminal block R88A CTUOO2N e Front surface Mounting Brackets Specification For the following Servo Drivers R88A TK01U 200 VAC 100 to 400 W 100 VAC 100 200 W For the following Servo Drivers R88A TK02U 200 VAC 750 W 100 VAC 300 W 6 8 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Models Conforming to EC Directives e Servomotors Specification Model O Straight shafts with Standard no 200 VAC 100W R88M UE10030V S1 keys brake 200 W R88M UE20030V S1 400 W R88M UE40030V S1 100 VAC 100 W R88M UE10030W S1 200 W R88M UE20030W S1 With brake 200 VAC 100 VAG e Servo Drivers with Pul
46. JIS B1301 1976 7 dia 7 dia Four Four RSS i ANNANN SOS SOS TROY SS OOOO SOS SOS ERA WS ON SOS OSOS ES 9 SSS ay ul i 145 185 Tr R S Ct A 4 e 750 W Models with Brake R88M UE75030V BS1 189 5 229 5 2 14 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 1 2 Installation Conditions m AC Servo Drivers e Space Around Drivers Install Servo Drivers according to the dimensions shown in the following illustration to ensure proper heat dispersion and convection inside the panel Also install a fan for circulation if Servo Drivers are installed side by side to prevent uneven temperatures from developing inside the panel Mount the Servo Drivers vertically so that the model number and writing can be read Z Fan Fan 50 mm min 2 2 2 Side of Unit E e o o 4 i w w 50 mm min 30 mm min W 10 mm min Z e Operating Environment Be sure that the environment in which Servo Drivers are operated meets the following conditions Ambient operating temperature 0 C to 50 C Ambient operating humidity 3596 to 8596 RH with no condensation Atmosphere No corrosive gases e Ambient Temperature Servo Drivers should be op
47. Note 1 Use mode 2 for origin search 2 contact is used to turn the electromagnetic brake ON and OFF 3 The open terminal must be left unconnected 4 OV and Common terminals are connected internally 5 The suitable crimp terminal is R1 25 3 round or fork type 19 XW2B OMRON XW2B 40J6 2B NC Module side X axis Servo side Y axis Servo side Triangle mark 180 7 09 63 6 2 50 Connection to Terminal Block The terminal signal name varies with the servo driver Refer to the Operation Manual of the servo driver in use Identify the servo driver in use by writing the name on the terminal nameplates Note The terminal block has a terminal pitch of 7 62 mm provided Affix the nameplate to the terminal cover onnection to Multi Axis Position Control Modules 200H NC211 U C200HW NC213 U C200HW NC413 U X a Ta X ac X axis X axis Y Y Y axis Y axis Y axis Y axis Y is emer is CW is isori is MING is axis axs origin RUN MING axis 24 gency imt cow gin RUN BKIR cw ccw prox BKIR 30 Stop imt prox imi limit miy com com 5248 com lt Y axiy v ad 28 axis Com remote Com Y axis ALM OV mon finterrupt mon RESET 26 meni men i mon mon JRESET com 19
48. Reverse rotation mode CCW direction is taken as forward rotation CCW direction is taken as reverse rotation No used Not used Command pulse mode 5 4 3 0 0 1 Feed pulse and Forward reverse signal Forward rotation pulse and Reverse rotation pulse 90 phase difference A B phase signal 1X 90 phase difference A B phase signal 2X 90 phase difference A B phase signal 4X we 5 CI E o p ea o A Deviation counter clear the deviation counter when the signal is 8 0 high level Clears the deviation counter on the rising edge of the signal b Not used Torque command filter C 0 Primary filter time constant Secondary filter E e e ami Parameter Unit monitor Position deviation monitor set for 1 command output lever change Position deviation monitor set for 100 com mand jr o sss Note 1 Do not change the settings of bits 1 2 6 to 9 b d and F of setup parameter no 2 Cn 02 Note 2 These parameters become effective only after power is reset Confirm that the indicators go out before turning power back on Check to see that the LED display has gone off 6 12
49. TutorialTest Citect Explorer Fa fos File View Tools Help wasi Project List Projects 5 CSV Example E Example 5 Tutorial b b b Alarms System Communic CicodeFiles CitectvBA Files Graphics Tags Ready n Click on the Citect Runtime icon i was successful to make run your project and prove your backup and restore operation To delete the TutorialTest project click File on the Citect Explorer menu then click Delete Project Congratulations By now you should have a basic working knowledge of CitectHMI SCADA software If you are keen to build your level of competency we recommend that you attend a Citect Training Course Details of training courses can be found at www citect com or by contacting your local Citect office or distributor 77 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Troubleshooting If you experience results that are different to what you see in the tutorial 1 Go back and double check what you have done Most likely you have done something different from the instructions The tutorial largely assumes CitectHMI SCADA is freshly installed and default settings haven t been changed By taking a closer look at the screens in the tutorial you may be able to identify any differences If problem is in Runtime shutdown runtime and restart it Read the Online Help Most dialog boxes have a help button that provides conte
50. and the Unit may malfunction TERMINAL WIRE CONNECTIONS The suitable crimp terminal is R1 25 3 round or fork type Terminal Screw Tightening Torque When connecting crimp terminals or wires to the terminal block be sure to tighten each crimp terminal or wire to 0 5 to 0 8 N m 4 9 to 7 8 kgf cm omnon XW2B TRACK MOUNTING More than one XW2B Servo Terminal Unit can be densely mounted to a DIN track in which case move the mounting stays from both sides of the XW2B to the bottom of the XW2B Secure both ends of the XW2B with end plates NOTE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25 4 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS INC One East Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 1 800 55 OMRON Cat No P20BFAD1 01 00 Specifications subject to change without notice OMRON CANADA INC 885 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario 5V8 416 286 6465 Printed in U S A Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 In approximately one hour completing this tutorial will give you abasic working knowledge of CitectHMI SCADA version 7 10 software Learn how to build a small project configure dynamic graphics create alarms and trends and then run your project like a real plant This tutorial will also show you some shortcuts that over time will save you far more than the one hour you may take to complete the exercises inside CitectSCADA Quickstart Tut
51. follow the instructions given there Warning labels ERO b ARAURA 765 4f8 ATESA May cause electric shock Disconnect all power and wait 5 min before servicing USP ARE m u L Use proper grounding techniques Warning label 2 Warning label 1 Warning Labels for Models Conforming to EC Directives amp WARNING DFP ie k Use proper REDRA GI BETRURE1765 Af EPIA T May cause electric shock Disconnect all power and wait 5 min before servicing grounding techniques Warning label 2 Warning label 1 VISUAL INDEX For users who wish to operate soon 1 The following portions of this manual provide the minimum information required for operation Be sure you fully understand at least the information in these portions before attempting opera tion Chapter 2 System Design and Installation and sections 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 and 3 6 of Chap ter 3 Operation Instructions for jog operation using a Parameter Unit are provided in 3 6 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Position Control Unit Programmable Controller C200H NC112 C200H NC211 Pulse M a Controller Connecting Cable Chapter 5 5 3 1 mF Position Control Unit 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 aT SYSMAC C CV series Programmable Controller Function Setting Parameter Setting 1 Setting and Checking User Parameters Chapter 3 section 3 5 1
52. internally 24 VDC 7 The suitable crimp terminal is R1 25 3 round or fork type XW2B omnon XW2Z CONNECTING CABLES Use the cables to connect the PLC Position Control Module to the XW2B Servo Terminal Blocks For C200H NC112 Use dis Wiring Diagram XW2Z J A1 27 13 1 C200H NC112 XW2B 20J6 1B nae pA SEND XG4M 2630 Connector Position Control Servo Terminal Module side Block side 26 25 1 1 L FCN 367J040 AU XG4M 2630 T F Fujitsu For C200HW NC113 Use M i Wiring Diagram XW2Z J A6 XW2Z J A6 C200H NC113 XW2B 20J6 1B with 40 poles o xG4M 2630 1 Connector Position Control Servo Terminal Module side Block side FCN 367J040 AU XG4M 2630 T Crimp terminal F Fujitsu XW2B XW2B For C200H NC211 Use omnon Wiring Diagram XW2Z J A2 XW2Z J A2 C200H NC211 Multi pole square 4206 28 connector with 34 poles Connector Position Control Servo Terminal Module side Block side 34 33 MR 34LF XG4M 3430 T Honda Tsushin Kogyo For C200HW NC213 NC413 Use po i n da al li Wiring Diagram XW2Z J A7 XW2Z J A7 C200H NC213 NC413 Multi pole square RCM A430 41 connector with 34 poles
53. the various constants are all the s ame The inertia for magnetic brakes is the load inertia Use a separate power supply for the magnetic brake excitation power e Specifications for AC Servomotors With Brakes Specifications in Common for 100 and 200 VAC R88M UE10030 0 40 x 1075 kgem G D2 4 Rotor inertia R88M R88M BS1 UE30030 UE20030 1 23 10 5 1 91 10 5 BS1 R88M UE40030 1 91 x 1079 BS1 R88M UE75030 6 71 x 1075 kgfecmes 0 41 x 1074 1 26 x 10 4 1 95 x 10 4 1 95 x 10 4 6 85 x 10 4 Brake inertia kgem 0 09 x 1075 G D2 4 0 58 x 10 5 1 40 x 10 5 kgfecmes 0 09 10 4 0 59 10 4 1 43 x 1074 kgem 0 49 x 1075 G D2 4 Total inertia 1 81 x 10 5 2 49 x 1075 2 49 x 1075 8 11 x 1075 kgfecmes 1 85 x 10 4 2 54 x 1074 2 54 x 10 4 8 28 x 10 4 Weight approx kg 1 6 2 2 2 2 4 3 Magnetized V voltage 24 VDC 10 No p olarity Power con 6 sumption 6 5 Current con sumption friction Sg 0 34 min 3 5 min Absorption time see note 1 0 27 1 5 min 15 0 min 100 max 200 max Release time 40 max see note 1 Backlash Insulation grade Note tric Industrial Co installed Note 2 The items in parentheses r 5 24 eference values 5
54. todo de Reset Modo de Rango Num rico formato en el que se almacena el PV del contador y el m todo de salidas externas Configurar la Tensi n de Entrada switches de la Tarjeta Montar la Tarjeta y Cablear las Entradas Setup del PLC Slot 1 DM6602 DM6640 DM6641 Slot 2 DM6611 DM6643 DM6644 Determinar el M todo de Chequeo de Cuenta comparaci n y bits internos externos de salida Programa Ladder del PLC Rango de Cuenta 50 KHz 500 KHz Modo de Entrada Fase Diferencial Pulso Direcci n Adelante Atr s M todo de Reset Fase Z Software Software Modo de Rango Num rico Modo Circular o Modo Lineal Formato del PV 8 D gitos BCD u 8 D gitos Hexadecimal M todo de las Salidas Externas NPN o PNP Rango de Cuenta 50 KHz 500 KHz Modo de Entrada Fase Diferencial Adelante Atr s Pulso Direcci n M todo de Reset Fase Z Software Software Modo de Rango Num rico Modo Circular o Modo Lineal Formato del PV 8 D gitos BCD u 8 D gitos Hexadecimal M todo de las Salidas Externas NPN o PNP M todos de Comparaci n por Valores Coincidentes o por Rangos de Comparaci n Bits de Salida cuando se cumplen las condiciones de comparaci n Internos y Externos TABLA DE COMPARACI N DE REGISTROS CTBL 63 Especificaci n del Puerto Registro de la Tabla de Comparaci n Comienzo de la Comparaci n MODO DE CONTROL INI 61 Especificaci n del Puerto cambio de
55. when power is cut off is approximately 1 5 times that of the varistor Use capacitors and resistors for vibration absorption of surge when power is cut off The reset time can be shortened by proper selection of the capacitor or resis tor Use a fast recovery diode with a short reverse recovery time Fuji Electric Co ERB44 06 or equiv alent Select varistor voltage as follows 39 V 200 V 270 V 470 V 24 VDC system varistor 100 VDC system varistor 100 VAC system varistor 200 VAC system varistor Okaya Electric Ind CR 50500 0 5 uF 50 Q CRE 50500 0 5 uF 50 Q S2 A 0 0 2 uF 500 Q Note Thyristors and varistors are made by the following companies Refer to manufacturers documentation for operating details Thyristors Ishizuka Electronics Varistors Ishizuka Electronics Co Matsushita Electric Parts e Contactors When selecting contactors take into consideration the circuit s inrush current and the momentary maxi mum current The Servo Driver inrush current is 50 A and the momentary maximum current is approxi mately twice the rated current The following table shows the recommended contactors Momentary maxi Model Rated current mum current 1 2 0 10 15 LC1 D093A60 11 200 24 VDC 200 220 VAC 200 to 240 e Leakage Breakers Selectleakage breakers designed for inverters Since switching operations take place inside the Servo Driver high frequency current leaks
56. 1 Reset con Fase Z 03 Bit de Reset del Contador 4 Reset por Software 0 No Reset Contador 1 Comparaci n Contador 2 Comparaci n Contador 3 Contador 4 0 Operaci n Continua 1 Paro de Operaci n IR 213 AR 06 oo Bitpara Forzar a Set la Salida Externa1 0 No afecta el Estado de la Bit para Forzar a Set la Salida Externa 2 Salida Bit para Forzar a Set la Salida Externa 3 1 Fuerza la Salida a ON Bit para Forzar a Set la Salida Externa 4 04 Bit para Habilitar el Forzado de Salidas 0 Deshabilitado el Forzado Externas de las Salidas 1 a 4 1 Habilitado el Forzado de las Salidas 1 a 4 SR 254 15 Flag de Error de la Tarjeta Opcional 0 No hay Error 1 Error Se pone a ON cuando se produce un Error en la Tarjeta Opcional montada en el Slot 1 2 AR 04 00 a 07 C digo de Error de la Tarjeta Opcional del 00 Hex Normal Slot 1 01 02 Hex Error Hardware 08 a 15 C digo de Error de la Tarjeta Opcional del 03 Hex Error en el Setup Slot 2 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 5 2 COM1H CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL Relaci n de la Configuraci n del Setup Cuando se Lee la 1 Slot2 Configuraci n DM 6602 DM 6611 00 03 Formato en el que se almacena el PV de los Cuando se da la Contadores de 1 a 4 alimentaci n 0 8 D gitos Hexadecimal 1 8 D gitos BCD 04 a 07 No utilizado 08a11 Configuraci n de las Salidas Externas 1 a 4 0 PNP 1 NPN No Utilizad
57. 3 14 3 5 4 Brake Interlock For Motors with 3 15 Trial Operation ci evo ee Pale eos EC B EROS RE Mey 3 18 3 6 1 Preparations for Trial Operation 3 18 326 2 Jog ODeration8 24 nere ep dye meee te er ERE Pete e ate an otaa anaes 3 20 Making Adjustments varios gogo RR RE ERE E daa 3 21 AUTO P 3 21 3 7 2 Manually Adjusting Gain 3 23 Regenerative Energy 3 27 3 8 1 Calculating Regenerative Energy 3 27 3 8 2 Servo Driver Absorbable Regenerative Energy 3 30 3 8 3 Absorption of Regenerative Energy with the External Regeneration Resistor 3 33 3 8 4 Processing Regenerative Energy with Multiple Axes Models Conforming to EC Directives 3 35 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Application 4 1 4217 Using Displays Z speed 4 2 4 1 T Display Functions us sas hr A 4 2 4 1 2 Status Display 4 4 4 1 3 Monitor Mode 2 4 5 4 1 4 Checking Servomotor Parameters Cn 00 Set to 04
58. 4 d gitos en BCD entre 0000 y 0200 de IR220 a IR223 para los selectores 0 a 3 respectivamente A modo de ejemplo el operador puede utilizar un selector anal gico para variar el tiempo de configuraci n de un temporizador mediante un destornillador para manipular el selector anal gico seleccionado para dicha funci n As el siguiente ejemplo muestra los 4 d gitos en BCD de 0000 a 0200 en el canal IR220 para poder variar el tiempo del temporizador TIMOOO El valor de configuraci n de TIM000 se configura externamente con IR220 El temporizador se ejecuta utilizando el valor configurado a trav s del selector anal gico 0 IR 20 2441 22 IR 223 Philip Send river GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 19 5 COMIH AVB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 5 2 Slot en el que se puede montar La tarjeta de Selectores Anal gicos se puede instalar o en el slot 1 slot izquierdo o en el slot 2 slot derecho del CQM1H CPU51 6 CQM1H CPU61 Sin embargo no se pueden utilizar ambos slots al mismo tiempo con dos tarjetas de selectores anal gicos 5 3 Nombres y Funciones Los cuatro controles anal gicos de la Tarjeta de Selectores Anal gicos est n localizados en el frente de la tarjeta El frente de la tarjeta no tiene ning n indicador El valor de los canales que representan a cada selector se incrementa o decrementa girando a derechas o izquierdas los selectores anal gicos respectivamente Es necesario utilizar
59. 5 4 3 0 1 0 90 differential phase A and B phases signal 1X Cn 02 bit nos 5 4 3 0 1 1 90 differential phase A and B phases signal 2x Cn 02 bit nos 5 4 3 1 0 0 90 differential phase A and B phases signal 4X Command Pulse Logic Reversal Cn 02 bit no d Cn 02 Positive logic Cn 02 bit 1 Negative logic 5 12 Specifications Chapter 5 Command Forward motor Reverse motor pulse commands commands 3 mode Forward pulse and direction Reverse pulse and forward a n differential r T E Forward pulse and direction signal T Forward commands Maximum frequency 200 kpps t1 0 1us t2 3 0us Reverse pulse and forward pulse Forward commands Maximum Reverse commands frequency 200 kpps 90 differential phase signals A and B pulses Maximum frequency 200 kpps 1 4 Forward commands Reverse commands t1 lt 0 1us gt 2 5us gt 5 0us Note Although the above timing charts show positive logic the same conditions hold for negative logic L level IL 1 mA H level IHO 2mA 5 13 Specifications Chapter 5 m Control Output Interface The output circuit for the control I O connector CN1 is as shown in the following diagram To other output circuits o x y K i External power supply T 12 to 24 VDC 1 f ya nie Cos JA T 10 a Maximum operating voltage 30 VDC NY
60. AC Servo Driver can be easily connected to the Connector Terminal Conversion Unit through a special cable without soldering Controller XW2B 40F5 P Connector Terminal Conversion Unit R88A CTU N Connector Cable for Connector Terminal Conversion Unit OMNUC U series UE Model AC Servo Driver Inl icu Power Cable R88A CAU R88A CAU Uo OMNUC U series UE Model Encoder Cable AC Servomotor R88A CRU Note Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications for connector and cable specifications 2 19 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 2 3 Wiring Servo Drivers Provide proper wire diameters ground systems and noise resistance when wiring terminal blocks m Wiring Terminal Blocks To Motor P Power Cable R88A CAU s R88A CAU B with brake The broken lines indicate signal lines for the brake There is no polarity on these lines Power supply The commercial power supply input terminals for the main circuit and the input control circuitry The power supply voltage depends on the model being used R88D UEPL IL IH Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V 50 60 Hz R88D UEPT IL Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 V 50 60 Hz Main circuit DC The terminals for connecting Regeneration Units R88A RGO8UA Connect output these terminals when there is a
61. CQM1 PRO01 E CS1W KS001 E Key Sheet supplied with C200H PRO27 E C200H PRO27 E Reference Information PC CQM1H To peripheral port on the CPU J 529 C200HS CN220 EU 2 m j 0 exea CS1W CN114 5 cm CQM1 CIFO2 PC To serial port on the CPU or Inner Board C200HS CN220 EU Program Download Cable C200H CN320 EU Communication Cable CPM2C and PC CPM2C 2 L e enn JL Hm ut LJ CS1W CN118 10 cm C200HS CN220 EU 2 m p 5 QU i b CS1W CN114 5 cm 1 2 CPM2C CN111 15 cm HMI CQM1 PRO01 E etc Reference Information CPM2C Serial Communication Adapter and PC CPM2C CPM2C CIF11 CPU Unit 2 2 CPM2C CIF11 CIF01 CPU Unit for Multi drop RS 422 RS 485 PC NT2S Message Display and Programmable Controllers Peripheral port Old type C200H SRM1 CPM2A CPM1A CPM2B Note CPM2B must use CS1W CN114 adapter NT2S SF121 NT2S CN212 2 m NT2S CN215 5 m NT2S SF122 123 NT2S CN222 V1 2 m NT2S CN225 V1
62. Cable i Note 1 Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to Units and the Servo Driver Note 2 Leave unused signal lines open and do not wire them Note 3 ERB44 02 diodes by Fuji Electric or equivalent are recommended for surge absorption Note 4 When using a3G2A5 NC111 EV1 Position Control Unit origin search is carried out according to the origin and origin proximity inputs Set the origin and origin proximity for the mechanical system Even after the 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 completes the origin search and pulses are stopped pulses are still accumulated in the deviation counter in the Servo Driver The Servo motor will move for the amount of residual pulses and then stop so there may be a discrepan Cy with the origin In order to minimize the amount of the discrepancy set the origin search proximity speed as low as possible Note 5 Use the RUN signal to set whether the Servo can be turned ON OFF Note 6 Class 3 grounds must be to 100 Q or less 6 6 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 6 2 U Series Standard Models m Non conforming Models e Servomotors Specification Weis Straight shafts with Standard no 200 VAC ier prake 109766 With brake 200 VAC 100 VAC R88M UE10030L BS1 R88M UE20030L BS1 R88M UE30030L BS1 e Servo Drivers with Pulse train Inputs Specification Model Pulse train input 200 VAC 1206 e Parameter Unit Specification
63. Command 1 Deviation Position Speed Current mode eration time G1 G2 counter loop gain x loop loop constant Encoder Speed Z phase detection output x4 e __u o 2 A Ss EY uw N SNP Encoder Motor 3 8 Regenerative Energy Absorption Regenerative energy produced at times such as Servomotor deceleration is absorbed by the Servo Driver s internal capacitors thereby preventing an increase in DC voltage If the regenerative energy from the Servomotor becomes too large however an over voltage error will occur In such cases it is necessary to connect a Regeneration Unit to increase the capacity for absorbing regenerative energy 3 8 1 Calculating Regenerative Energy Regenerative energy is produced when the direction of Servomotor rotation or output torque is re versed The methods for calculating regenerative energy for the horizontal and vertical shafts are ex plained below 3 27 Operation Chapter 3 m Horizontal Axle N Motor operation Motor output torque Note In the output torque graph when the rotation direction and the torque direction match it is shown as positive The regenerative energy for each section can be found by means of the following formulas 1 2 1 et 1 027 x 10 2 J Ego 1 2 No e to 1 027 x 10 2 J 4 N Rotation speed at beginning of deceleration r min Tp1
64. Driver Soldered plug at cable side 17LE 13090 27 D2BC 17JE 23090 02 D1 Cover at cable side 17JE 09H 15 OMRON Soldered plug at cable side 2 0901 Cover at cable side XM2S 0912 m CN4 Not Used 5 18 Specifications Chapter 5 5 1 4 Explanation of User Parameters Refer to 3 4 2 Setup Parameter Contents and 3 5 2 User Parameter Chart for a table of user parame ters and setup parameters e Speed Loop Gain Cn 04 This isthe proportional gain for the speed controller The adjustable range is 1 to 2 000 Hz the response frequency when equivalent inertia is used As the number is increased the gain is increased The factory setting is for 80 Hz Using the factory setting for the Servomotor alone or with a small load inertia will cause vibration to occur so set the value to a maximum of 20 Hz for operation e Speed Loop Integration Constant Cn 05 This is the integration time for the speed controller The adjustable range is 2 to 10 000 ms and it is factory set to 20 ms As the number is increased the gain is decreased e Brake Timing Cn 12 These parameters determine the output timing of the brake interlock signal BKIR which controls the electromagnetic brake Brake timing sets the delay time from the time of brake interlock goes OFF until the servo turns off A dynamic brake will be applied when the Run command turns OFF while the motor is operating when a Servo error occurs or when power is turned off Th
65. Genie c Create a new genie for groups of objects that have common attributes Super Genie d Create a new super genie that can be accessed at runtime Click on the Page button An additional popup form will appear allowing you to select a base template from which to create your new page Use Template Template Normal Instead of double clicking on Normal we could single click on Normal and then iw hard InstantTrend sad sasi click OK but that takes more time Popup_large popup_mid Popup_small lt summary trend E Make sure XP Style is selected in the Style box then Double Click tne Normal template as shown D The fastest way to drive any application is with the keyboard Most programs have shortcut keys you may be surprised how quickly you can learn them Templates provide a vast range of pre built functionality making the task of building a new project with CitectSCADA extremely fast All pages must be based on a template even if it is a blank template If you want to customize the look and feel of your pages you can create your own templates from scratch or copy the existing ones and modify them NOTE Never modify templates symbols or other items in the Example Include or CSV Include projects These projects will be automatically re loaded when you upgrade to the next version and your changes will be lost Always
66. Grid is an excellent assistant however sometimes we want to align a group of objects quickly relative to each other For this we use the Align tool Select all three buttons by clicking on each of them while holding the CTRL key down for the last two All three buttons should have a selection indication at their button left and be bounded by a large transparent rectangle identified by the four corners and four center points as shown below From the Graphics Builder toolbar select Arrange andthen Align An alignment popup form will appear asking you how you would like to arrange the selected objects Select Left for the horizontal alignment and Even for the vertical alignment then Click OK Tools Window Help Align xm Align Ctrl Rotate gt Ctrl R Vertical Horizontal Mirror Ctrl M Top Left C Centre Group Objects Bottom Right Ungroup Objects Even C Even Bring to Front j None Send to Back Bring Forwards Cancel Help Send Backwards Repeat this exercise for the lights to the right of the buttons Try selecting a button and a light and aligning them vertically via the Centre selection before aligning all three lights Evenly Keep going until you are satisfied with the arrangement of the objects on your screen O Another to select multiple objects is to drag the cursor around them while holding the left mouse button down to lasso the objects You will need to be
67. Interrupciones La tarjeta 21 puede ejecutar una subrutina de interrupci n cuando el valor del contador de alta velocidad coincide con un valor objeto previamente programado o una subrutina de interrupci n cuando el PV del contador cae dentro de un rango de comparaci n especificado 3 3 Salida de Pulsos 1 y 2 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A La tarjeta opcional CQM1H PLB21 dispone de 2 salidas de pulsos entre 10 Hz y 50 KHz a trav s de los puertos 1 y 2 En ambos se puede configurar un ciclo de trabajo fijo o variable GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 13 3 COM1H PLB21 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 3 4 Puertos 1 y 2 A trav s de estos puertos se pueden utilizar simult neamente las 2 Entradas de Pulsos Contador de Alta Velocidad y las 2 Salidas de Pulsos 3 5 Configuraci n del Sistema Tarjeta de E S de Pulsos Entrada de Pulsos 2 Entrada de Pulsos 1 Encoder Incrementnal m i knees Encoder Incremental 3 6 Pineado del Puerto CN1 y CN2 La disposici n de pines es id ntica para los puertos CN1 y CN2 Situaci n de los Pines Com n de Entrada Entrada de 2 Entrada de Pulsos Z 24 VDC Pulsos Entrada de Encoder A 24 VDG Entrada de Encoder B 24 VDG 5 SaidadePusosCcCw Salidade 6 Salida de Pulsos CW Salida PWM Pulsos Salida EN iain Salida 9 Entrada de Pulsos Z 12 VDC Entrada de Pulsos Salida de 1 6 Salida de CW
68. Lock object Unlock Object Break Lock Mode Properties View Objects Text Arrange Tools Ctrl Z From the Edit menu select Cut Link This will sever the symbol s link with the library and allow us to manipulate it as a stand alone object If we did not sever this link then we would have to modify the object in the library rather than on the page which would distribute the change to all instances of the object throughout the project Note that you should never modify the libraries that are supplied with the product If you require a variation of these objects you should copy them into your own library and create the variations there From the Tools menu select Swap Colors Window Help gm Object Ctrl G Swap Colors Adjust Colors Edit Favorite Colors Convert to Bitmap Bitmap Editor F9 Update Pages Pack Libraries Variable Tags Ctrl T Citect Fonts Batch Recipe Editor Batch Equipment Editor Advanced Batch Setup Wizard Creating Graphics Pages Managing True Colors continued 54 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Making sure that the Swap Range option is selected select any shade of grey for the From Color and any shade of purple for the To Color then click OK The tank should now be a 3D rendered purple variation of the original grey object For more flexible color management you can use the Adjust Colors tool also available from the Tools menu This tool allows you to se
69. Logon button or pull down menu on the navigation bar This will produce a Login form in which you can enter your user name and password as shown below Use the local Citect user we created called kernel with a password of citect Alternatively if you know your local computer admin account or domain admin account you can login using those credentials as shown in the second example below Login Form Login Form Name 0 Name Ctect Admin J Password T Password ES EST OR If your login was successful you should see the logged in user name at the top right of the page The alarm acknowledge functions will now be available to you Windows users local to the Citect PC can use the login name directly but domain users will require the domain name followed by a back slash then the user name Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime continued 38 Alarms folle 52 Pages Trends Alams Tools kernel i O 0 MEG m o 8 o Acknowledge Tasks Acknowledge all alarms on the current page Acknowledge the alarm that is selected Silence the alarm sound Alarm Page Tasks 9 Page top of the alarm list Page up the alarm list hL Page down the alarm list All pages are shown Alarm List Filter Tasks Apply a filter to the list Pump 1 Mode Acknowledge Disable x Enable Help CitectSCADA Once logged in try accessing the alarm acknowledgement features aga
70. Modo de Pulso y Direcci n Operaci n de Comparaci n Cuando el PV Valor Presente del Contador de Alta Velocidad coincide con un valor objeto o est dentro de un rango de comparaci n de los programados dicho resultado se muestra en los bits internos y externos de salida GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 3 2 COM1H CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL Salidas Externas Se puede producir la activaci n de hasta 4 salidas externas cuando el PV del contador coincide con uno de los valores objeto o est dentro de uno de los rangos de comparaci n Nota La Tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad no viene provista de Interrupciones de Contador de Alta Velocidad Simplemente compara el PV del contador con valores objeto o rangos de comparaci n y activa un bit de salida interno o externo 2 2 Slots que se pueden Utilizar La Tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad se puede instalar en el slot 1 slot izquierdo o en el slot 2 slot derecho del CQM1H CPU51 61 Ambos slots pueden estar ocupados por una de estas tarjetas al mismo tiempo por tanto se pueden tener montadas dos tarjetas de este tipo en una sola CPU 2 3 Especificaciones Instrucciones Se utilizan las instrucciones CTBL 63 INI 61 y PRV 62 Relaci n de Bits de Control Flags e Informaci n de Estado west IN Slot2 Sot PV 4 d gitos de menor peso El PV del Contador de Alta PV 4 d gitos de mayor peso Velocidad de cada puerto se P
71. N comunicaciones 1 1 1 N con terminales programables e NT Link 1 1 comunicaciones 1 N con terminales programables En el siguiente diagrama se puede ver un ejemplo de los distintos dispositivos que se pueden conectar a la tarjeta Nota Los modos NT Link 1 1 y NT Link 1 N utilizan distintos protocolos y no son compatibles entre s Prag ares iti gy Papaman otra ie ele Tap fied AT eren PO Pinel anapi ici ic Protocol macras T Link 1 1 Gala Lirik RS 232C Has Link Links COMA anos CPU sonal Carmundcadiens Board Peed ME 5 ma Pregaenneshh antennal unica Tema T 2 Pami 1 1 enr 5 Prolene macras MT L rik Data Link ine Hosti Link Mo prolocol Hast Link OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 26 7 5 41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 7 3 Macros de Protocolo Las macros de protocolo proporcionan un sistema para crear protocolos de comunicaciones de datos de acuerdo con las especificaciones de comunicaciones de dispositivos externos con puerto serie semi d plex sincronizaci n start stop Las macros de protocolo se crean con el Software de Soporte CX Protocol para despu s grabar las macros creadas en la tarjeta de comunicaciones serie donde se podr n ejecutar en cualquier
72. NT631C CN324 EU 3 0 m cable 9 to 9 pin NT to Mits A PLC V042 E1 1 Operation Manual PC Mitsubishi Connection 17 18 Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs Mitsubishi FX Series PLCs Communicates via Mitsubishi s Computer Link protocol The Omron NT and Mitsubishi FX Series PLC are communicating using RS422 communications The NT31 cable connects from the 25 pin port B while the NT631 connects from the RS422 terminal screws for Port B Mitsubishi FX Series NT631 Port B Terminal Strip 25 Pin Connector RS422 E NT31C CN325 EU Mitsubishi A Series Communication Cables and Accessories NT31 Port B NT31C CN325 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 25 pin NT to Mits FX NT631C CN325 EU 3 0 m cable 4 Wires to 25 pin NT to Mits FX PLC FX 20P CADP Cable for FX0 amp FXON PLC buy from Mitsubishi V042 E1 1 Operation Manual PC Mitsubishi Connection Modicon TSX Micro 37 21 22 amp Premium Series PLCs For RS 232C connection PLC Side Omron TSX SCP CD 1030 NT Side E NT31 Port A NT631 Port or B H l I 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male TSX SCP111 TSX SCP CD 1030 Metric Thread E PLC Side Omron TSX SCP CD 1030 NT Side NT31 Port B 2 SD 3 RD e 7 SG 25 Pin Female 25 Pin Male Metric Thread Modicon TSX Series Communication Cables and Accessories TSX SCP111 Multi protocol PCMCIA card for RS 232C TSX SCP114 Multi protocol PCMCIA
73. Port B only XW2Z 500T 2 205 6005 NT21 31 631 13 Cable Solutions for Omron PLCs NT2S SF121 NT2S CN212 2 m NT2S CN215 5 m NT2S SF122 123 NT2S CN222 V1 2 m NT2S CN225 V1 5 m Peripherat port New type CJi CS1 CQM1H CPM2C 1 1 NT2S CN224 V1 2 m NT2S Custom Cables Any Omron NT2S SF121 PLC Serial Port Male DB9 Male DB9 4 Create custom cable RS232C Metric TD2 2 TXD English Threads 3 7 eee reads 6 mm 3 dan 4 40 screw 1 SHED 2 5 GROUND Purchase Omron s C200H CN320 EU and GROUND 9 7777777 787 9 short pins 5 and 9 on NT side as shown 4 5 NT2S SF122 PLC Serial Port Male DB9 Female DB9 RS232C m Metric TXD 2 2 GROUND Engin Threads reads 26mm PP 8960735 I 3 TxD 4 40 screw GROUND 9 E 4 VOLTIN 5 VDC svoe 6 777 75 21 4 5 GROUND 1 SHIELD 75 7 232 oa Custom Cable Ordering Information 5 Description Part Number Metric thread shell and screws 2 6 mm XM2S 0911 English thread shell and screws 4 40 screw 25 0913 Male connector 2 0901 Female connector XM2D 0901 14 Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1200 An alternative cable configuration uses a custom RS 232 9 to 9 PIN cable connecting to the Allen Bradley 1767 CBL PM02 Series C The diagram below shows the pinouts fo
74. Rango Num rico M todo de Reset 50 KHz Modo Lineal Fase Z Software Software Modo Circular Fase Z Software Modo Lineal Modo Circular OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 6 2 COMIH CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 2 4 Contadores de Alta Velocidad de 1 a 4 Se ales de Entrada y Modos de Entrada Modo de Fase Diferencial Velocidad de Cuenta 25 KHz 250 KHz Modo Adelante Atr s Velocidad de Cuenta 50 KHz 500 KHz Modo Pulso Direcci n Velocidad de Cuenta 50 KHz 500 KHz Rangos Num ricos Modo Circular de 00000000 a 08388607 en BCD de 00000000 a O7FFFFFF en Hex Modo Lineal de 8388608 8388607 en BCD de F8000000 a O7FFFFFF en Hex Modo Circular Modo Lineal M x Valor de Cuenta Q NT d FHGOUGQOU Hox f EERS BCD WFFFFFF Decrementa I Incrementa aeo gt EX P M todos de Reset Reset de Fase Z Software Reset por Software M todos de Chequeo para las Interrupciones de Contador de Alta Velocidad M todo por Valores Coincidentes hasta 48 valores objeto M todo por Rangos de Comparaci n hasta 16 rangos OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 7 2 COMIH CTB41 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH Procedimiento para Utilizar los Contadores de Alta Velocidad Determinar el Rango de Cuenta Modo de Entrada M
75. Runtime sl icon visited Use the navigation menu to access your graphics display called MyPage Click on Auto button then click On Manual Click On Off You will see that both pipes change color as the group properties you configured will be applied to everything in the group in this case both pipes 18 MyPage J ss Pages Trends Alarms Tools O HEA m 2 0 You will also see an alarm is generated and displayed on the alarm bar at the bottom of the page when you switch to Manual mode The Alarm icon at the bottom left will flash to indicate that you have new unacknowledged alarms Click on this Alarm icon to view the Alarm page 61 62 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime continued I 18 Alarms Lo Jf Pages Trends Alarms Tools O MEAG m 2 8 Acknowledge Tasks Date Acknowledge all alarms the current Acknowledge the alarm that is selected Silence the alarm sound Alarm Page Tasks 9 Page top of the alarm list Page up the alarm list gt down the alarm list pages shown Alarm List Filter Tasks 49 Apply a filter to the list If you try to acknowledge the alarm from the alarm menu at the top left of the screen or by right clicking on an alarm you will notice that you do not have access to these features By default you require a privilege level of 1 to use these features Click on the
76. Salida PWM con resistencia de 1 6 Fuente de Alimentaci n para la Salida OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 14 3 COMIH PLB21 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 3 7 Especificaciones del Contador de Alta Velocidad Especificaciones del Contador ne o _ el Setup del PLC Diferencial Pulso Direcci n Adelante Atr s Puerto1 Pueto2 0000002 Decremental Incremental M todo de Entrada Diferencia de Fase Pulsos de Fase aooo Simp 2 25KHz 50KHz 1 joKz Modo Lineal 8388608 a 8388607 Modo Circular 0 a 64999 PV del Contador Puerto 1 IR 233 mayor peso e IR 232 menor peso Puerto 2 IR 235 mayor peso e IR 234 menor peso Formato de los Datos 8 D gitos BCD Modo Lineal F8388608 a 8388607 F para valores negativos Modo Circular 00000000 a 00064999 M todo de Control Valor Objeto Hasta 48 valores objeto e interrupciones Comparaci n M todo de Reset del Contador Se al de la Fase Z Reset de Software Reset por Software Bits de Reset Puerto 1 SR 252 01 y Puerto 2 SR 252 02 3 8 Especificaciones de la Salida de Pulsos Especificaciones Ciclo de Trabajo Fijo Ciclo de Trabajo Sin Mismo Rango de Rangos Separados Variable Aceleraci n Decele Aceleraci n Decele de raci n Trapezoidal raci n Aceleraci n Decele raci n PULS 65 SPED 64 PULS 65 ACC Frecuencia de 10 Hz a 50 KHz 0 Hz
77. Servo Driver and brake These filters are manufactured by Okaya Electric Ind Application Rated Test voltage Insulation Leakage Attenuation current resistance current characteristic max Normal Common MHz MHz 200 V 100W SUP P5H 5A Between Between 0 6 mA 0 5to30 0 2to 30 Brake power supply EPR 4 terminals terminals at 250 Vrms 1 250 Vrms case 60 Hz 200 V 200 or 400 W SUP P8H 8A 50 60 Hz 605 6 000 MQ min 0 61030 0 31030 100 V 100 W EPR 4 Between at 500 VDC terminals and 200 V 750 W SUP P10H 10A case 0 7 30 0 4 to 30 100 V 200 or 300W EPR 4 2 000 V rms 50 60 Hz 60 s The appearance of the noise filters is shown below Screw terminals are used 74 7 0 5 63 5271 2 35 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e Surge Killers Install surge killers for loads that have induction coils such as relays solenoids brakes clutches etc The following table shows types of surge killers and recommended products Type Featues 7 _ Recommended products Diodes are relatively small devices such as relays used Use a fast recovery diode with a for loads when reset time is not an issue The reset time short reverse recovery time is increased because the surge voltage is the lowest Fuii uji Electric Co ERB44 06 or equiv when power is cut off Used for 24 48 VDC systems J q alent Thyristor and varistor are used for loads when induction
78. Servomotors with brakes are specialized holding brakes with non magnetized operation Therefore set the parameters so that the brake power supply is turned off after the Servomo tor stops Ifthe brake is applied whilethe Servomotoris operating the brake will suffer abnormal wear or even damage and will quickly become defective For wiring methods refer to 2 2 5 Peripheral Device Connection Examples m Function The output timing of the brake interlock signal BKIR that control turning the magnetic brake ON and OFF can be set m Parameters to be Set Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range Cn 12 Brake timing 10 ms 0 to 50 Delay time setting from brake command until servo turns off 3 15 Operation Chapter 3 m Operation e Timing for Run Command RUN When Servomotor is Stopped Run instruction RUN OFF i 25 to 35 ms Approx 6 ms Brake interlock o N i signal BKIR OFF Brake power supply OFF j e 200 ms max P 100 ms Brake Cancelled operation Maintained Pulse train See note 1 command LER EE ee cwccw OFF i Cn 12 see note 2 x MN motor Power off Note 1 Ittakes upto 200 ms for the brake to be cleared after the brake power supply has been turned on Taking this delay into account have the speed command be given after the brake has been cleared Note 2 Ittakes upto 100 ms for the brake to be he
79. Toolbox click on the button icon To draw the button click and hold the left mouse button while moving the mouse then release the left mouse button ie click and drag the mouse L Citect Graphics Builder Tutorial MyPage El File Edit View Objects Tex Arange Tools Window Help Eon a x Sa 2181215 9 8 Dios l gt 5 irs CSV Display Title 1 m Time 1 n ti aso 38s GUIDE GRID 1 70x30 The position and size ofthe currently selected object are shown at the bottom right of the graphics builder status bar The Toolbox options are from left to right and top to bottom Free form line Straight line Square Rectangle Circle Oval Polygon Pipe Text Number Button Animated symbol Trend Function Static symbol Genie ActiveX Process Analyst Database Exchange 22 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Buttons continued Once you release the mouse button the Button Properties dialog popup will appear Double Click on the word button the Text edit box This is a quick way to select a complete word Next type Manual Appearance Movement Access Type Font Style Size 4 Text Arial Regular 8 ES Symbol E A C Target A
80. absorb all of the regenerative energy Remove the short bar from be tween the RG and JP terminals on the Regeneration Unit and connect the resistor be tween the P and RG terminals Connecting to the wrong terminals may destroy the Re generation Unit so connect the resistor carefully The Regeneration Unit does not con form to EC Directives The external regeneration resistor will heat to approximately 120 C Do not install it near devices or wiring that is sensitive to heat Install heat radiation plates suitable to the radi ation conditions m External Regeneration Resistors e Models Resistance Nominal Regeneration Heat Thermal switch capacity absorption at radiation output specifications 120 C conditions R88A RR22047S 479 5 220 W 70 W t1 0 x 1350 Operating SPCC temperature 170 C N C contact 3 33 Operation Chapter 3 e Combining External Regeneration Resistors Doe Regeneration absorption capacity ow 25W Combining external regeneration A prm resistors R Note Use a combination with an absorption capacity larger than the average regenerative power P e Dimensions Unit mm Thermal switch output m Wiring External Regeneration Resistors Remove the short bar from between the RG and JP terminals on the Regeneration Unit and connect the resistor s between the P and RG terminals Short bar Note The thermal switch output must be connected in the same way as the ALM
81. be positioned near the input terminal block ground plate and I O lines should be isolated and wired using the shortest means possible 2 32 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Wire the noise filter as shown at the left in the following illustration The noise filter should be installed at the entrance to the control panel whenever possible Good Separate input and output NO Noise not filtered effectively 487 3 1 3 AC input NF E AC output ACinput NF 2 4 2 4 Ground Ground AC output Use twisted pair cables for the power supply cables whenever possible or bind the cables L1 J L1 Driver or 2242 Driver L2 1 E Binding Separate power supply cables and signal cables when wiring m Control Panel Structure Any gaps in the cable entrances mounting screws cover or other parts of a control panel can allow electric waves to leak from or enter the control panel The items described in this section must be abided by in panel design and selection to ensure that electric waves cannot leak or enter the control panel e Case Structure Useametal control panel with welded joints on the top bottom and all sides The case must be electri cally conductive When assembling the control panel remove the coating from all joints or mask the joints when coat ing to ensure electrical conductivity
82. careful not to select additional objects if you use this method 31 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Aligning Objects continued Os You may notice that the lights are not perfectly in line with the center line of the buttons This is because the hot TIP spot or anchor point for this symbol is in the top left of the symbol rather than in the middle To correct for this we The Zoom tool can be quickly will use the zoom and the nudge tools toggled on and off using the r10 key To make sure your objects are aligned or positioned perfectly you can use the Zoom tool From the Menu select View Show Zoom View Objects Text Arrange Tools Refresh Grid Setup v Snapto Grid F8 Guidelines Setup Snap to Guidelines FI v Show Tool Bar v Show Tools F3 Show Zoom F10 v Show Status Bar v Show Scroll Bars Cross Hair Cursor Mouse Slow Speed v Cursor Keys Slow Speed Restore Move Size Close Alt F4 Zoom In Num Zoom Out gt zoom tool will display enlarged view of the region around your cursor You can alter the magnification by clicking in the top left corner of the zoom window You can move the zoom window by placing the cursor on the title bar the big blue bar at the top then hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse You can change the magnification of the zoom by clicking on the pop up s window icon and selecting to Zoom In o
83. coincida con un valor objeto especificado o caiga dentro de uno de los rangos de comparaci n programados GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 16 4 21 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL 4 1 Configuraci n del Sistema Farjeta Irina de encoder Driver dun Enender absit Dalila el Anuales de rotaci n y iones la masa ido pecexiam 4 2 Slot en el que se puede montar La Tarjeta de Encoder Absoluto s lo se puede montar en el Slot 2 Slot Derecho del 51 CQM1H CPU61 4 3 Pineado del Puerto CN1 y CN2 La disposici n de pines es id ntica para los puertos CN1 y CN2 Situaci ndelosPines N dePin 1 a 3 F 78478 d MOL mum uus No utilizado Com n de Entrada am 7 1 gt 8 ml 0 1 Bit 2 del c digo gray binario del encoder O Bit 2 del c digo gray binario del encoder Bit 2 del c digo gray binario del encoder 12 Bit 2 del c digo gray binario delencoder 2 Bit 2 del c digo gray binario del encoder 1 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR CQM1H MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 17 4 COMIH ABB21 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 4 4 Especificaciones de las Entradas de Encoder Absoluto Elemento Especificaciones 8 bit 10 bit o 12 bit Configurado en el Setup del PLC Compensaci n de Origen Si se puede designar la actual posici
84. configured in runtime To configure the page navigation portion of this menu click Pages Click Update Page List on the Pages menu will force SEIS CitectSCADA to update its runtime menu to include any unlisted Pages Trends Alarms Tools Update Page List we uy w Wa Start Returning to the Pages menu you will now see your page included in the navigation menu Click on MyPage now Pages Trends Alarms Tools MyPage 3 A Update Page List z LU Hcc Your page will now display Testing Graphics Pages Runtime continued Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 f MyPage Cies Pages Trends Alams Tools O mS 9 O CitectSCADA 07 51 24 PM Tue Oct 21 2008 Click on the Manual button then the Auto button and check to see that the appropriate light turns cyan Also check that the On Off button becomes unavailable for selection whilst in Auto mode Move the mouse over the On Off button and wait a couple of seconds to see that the tool tip appears See what happens if you click on the On Off button Click on Manual and then try clicking on the On Off button again If you ve made it to this point give yourself a gold star and take a moment to stretch your muscles 39 40 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Analog Indicators amp Controls To switch from runtime back to Graphics Builder press Alt Space together then click on
85. into settings mode cn 2 Press the Up and Down Keys to display the desired user parameter number The number will be incremented or decremented each time the Up or Down Key is pressed 3 Press the DATA Key to display the setting of the specified parameter 4 Press the DATA Key again to return to the parameter number display e Parameter Display Example Parameter Number Display 1 2 Data Display DATA 0 0 8 0 DATA 51 4 m Setting User Parameters First use the previous procedure to display the settings of the user parameter Then use the following procedures to set user parameters e Making Settings with Handy type R88A PR02U 1 Use the Right and Left Keys to select the digit that is to be set The digit for which the value can be changed will blink Press the Up and Down Keys to change the value of the digit Repeat the previous two steps as required to set the parameter Press the MODE SET or DATA Key The parameter will be set and the display will blink Press the DATA Key again to return to the parameter number display O Repeat steps 1 through 5 above required to set other parameters Note 1 Settings can also be made by pressing only the Up and Down Keys in stead of using steps 1 2 This will enable setting digits higher than the one that is blinking Use whichever meth od is faster for the number of digits that nee
86. kpps Position loop gain 1 to 500 1 s Electronic gear Electronic gear ratio setting range 0 01 G1 G2 100 G1 G2 1 to 65 535 Positioning completed range 0 to 250 command units Position acceleration deceleration 0 to 64 0 ms The same setting is used for acceleration and decel time constant eration Input sig Position command pulse input TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V nals see note Feed pulse and direction signal forward pulse and reverse pulse or 90 differential phase A and B phases signal set via parameter Pulse width See note Deviation counter reset TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V Sequence input 24 VDC 5 mA photocoupler input external power supply 12 to 24 VDC 30 mA min Output sig Position feedback output Z phase open collector output 30 VDC 20 mA nals 1 pulse revolution OFF on Z phase detection Sequence output Alarm output brake interlock positioning completion open collector outputs 30 VDC 50 mA External regeneration processing Required for regeneration of Required for regeneration of more than 30 times the motor s more than 20 times the motor s rotor inertia rotor inertia Protective functions Overcurrent grounding overload overvoltage overspeeding run away prevention transmission errors encoder errors deviation counter overflow Note The input pulse width must meet the following conditions H
87. ms Weight Corresponding Servo Driver x o o 1 22 N n oum e gt AlN m o Approx 0 5 Approx 1 1 Approx 1 7 R88D UEP10L R88D UEP12L R88D UEP15L UEP10W UEP12W UEP15W Note The values for torque and rotational speed characteristics are the values at an armature winding tempera ture of 100 C combined with the Servo Driver Other values are at normal conditions 20 C 65 The maximum momentary torque is a reference value e AC Servomotor Heat Radiation Conditions When AC Servomotor is continuously operated at the rated conditions a heat radiation plate equiva lent to an rectangular aluminum plate of t6 x 250 mm is required at the Servomotor flange mounting area This is for horizontal mounting with nothing around the Servomotor and no interference from heat convection currents 5 23 Specifications Chapter 5 m Specifications for Servomotors with Magnetic Brakes The magnetic brakes installed in Servomotors with brakes are status holding brakes with non magnetized operation The magnetic brake is released when a magnetic cur rent 24 VDO is applied The magnetic brake is not meantto be used for braking Using it for braking will damage it During Servomotor operation be sure to release the magnetic brake by applying a magnetic voltage The specifications for Servomotors with brakes are similarto those for Servomotors without brakes so except for inertia and weight
88. nos 14 15 16 17 18 12 to input for control DC 24 V input 14 RUN Run command input ON Servo ON when setup parameter Cn 01 bit no 0 0 When setup parameter Cn 01 bit no 0 1 this sig nal is not used Automatically set to Servo ON MING Gain deceleration input ON Decrease speed loop gain 16 POT Forward drive prohibit in Forward rotation overtravel input OFF when prohib put ited When setup parameter Cn 01 bit no 2 1 this signal is not used Reverse drive prohibit in Reverse rotation overtravel input OFF when prohib put ited When setup parameter Cn 01 bit no 3 1 this signal is not used ON Servo alarm status is reset Do not connect 5 8 Specifications Chapter 5 e CN1 Control Output Pin No Signalname Function comms 7 BKIR Brake interlock output Outputs external brake interlock signal 8 INP Positioning competed out Turned ON when the pulse count remaining in the put deviation counter is equal to or less than the posi tioning completed range set in user parameter Cn 1b 9 Do connect 10 OGND Output ground common Output ground common for BKIR VCMP INP TGON CLIMT CAM NC Cn __ AA E Encoder Z phase output 1 pulse revolution OFF ZCOM Encoder Z phase output When Z phase is detected When an alarm is generated for the Servo Driver uc au Note Pin 36is notused on models conforming to EC Direc
89. on and off E Security Same area as page ia V No privilege restrictions evi None Logging QF es Log device Cancel Apply Help y Click on the Insert icon 51 Click Insert Tag Double Click Pump 1 Mode and Add the text 0 after the tag Leave the disabled style as Embossed Button Properties Appearance Movement v Input Y Access Disable when Pump_1_Mode 0 Disable on insufficient area or privilege peus amnesia Disable style Embossed C Grayed C Hidden Clear Property Cancel Apply Help Click OK when you re finished When Pump 1 Mode is 0 or FALSE i e in Auto this button will be disabled The button s appearance will be altered using the Embossed style to indicate that it is disabled and it will not highlight when the cursor moves over it The tool tip will still work normally gt Under the access tab you may notice there is a section called security This is a very powerful feature in CitectSCADA that allows you to precisely define who can access what Configuring security is covered in the CitectSCADA Configuration training course Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Symbol Sets Our control buttons for our pump are now complete We will now add symbol indicators to show what state the pump is in These indicator lights will show whether the pump is on or off and whether it is i
90. output from the Re generation Unit i e so that power supply is broken when the contacts open 3 34 Operation Chapter 3 3 8 4 Processing Regenerative Energy with Multiple Axes Models Conforming to EC Directives When using multiple axes the terminals on the Servo Drivers can be connected to andthe terminals be connectedtogether to use regenerative energy as the drive energy for the other axes thus absorbing the energy Servo Drivers with different power supply voltages however cannot be connected Also regeneration absorption capacity will not be increased when all axes simultaneously produce regenerative ener gy m Wiring Method Example for 3 Axes Z j j A 9 AA lo CR A Z c gt LAA oy 2 j Ll YES 7 O ZZ AS Note 1 Do not open or close the connections between the or terminals while power is being sup plied The Units may be destroyed Note 2 Do not connect Servo Drivers that are using different power supply voltages The Units may be destroyed Regeneration absorption capacity will not be increased when all axes simultaneously produce regen erative energy Take one or more of the following methods if this occurs Reduce the number of rotations being used Regenerative energy is directly proportional to the square of the number of rotations Increase the deceleration time This will reduce
91. required Output power supply 0 V 23 N ug R88A CAU s 5VDC U Power Cable HA i White N lt X axis pulse CW with resistance 2 1 Cw V Q man output CW without resistance 3 12 CW w Green gt CCW with resistance 13 4 l3 CCW FC CCW without resistance 14 4 l 5 ECRST X axis deviation counter reset output 4 6 ECRST CN2 V X axis positioning completed input 8 8 INP RE E 12to 24 VDC R88A CRU Gor pm X axis origin input 10 __133 2 Cable X axis origin common 11 32 Z X Y axis input common 22 3 24VIN E ae X axis external interrupt input 6 OO O O O O 14 RUN X axis origin proximity input T G e o 18 RESET X axis CCW limit input 17 e 10 OGND X axis CW limit input 18 5 ALMCOM X Y axis emergency stop input 19 se I 34 ALM 24 VDC Shell FG FG 12 R88A CPU 5 General purpose Cable Note 1 Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to Units and the Servo Driver Note 2 Leave unused signal lines open and do not wire them Note 3 Use mode 2 for origin search Note 4 Use a dedicated power supply 24 VDC for command pulse signals Note 5 ERB44 02 diodes by Fuji Electric or equivalent are recommended for surge absorption Note 6 This wiring diagram is an example of X axis wiring only
92. status bar is not visible go to the View menu on the menu bar and click on Show Status Bar On the Toolbox click on the Paste Symbol tool When the Symbol selection popup appears use the scroll bars to locate the xp sliders library and then Click on it to select that library Symbol right normal Library c lt I lt j left_disabled left hot left normal left pressed valve hand valve solonoid valves Cancel Edit dll Linked i Help Double Click on right_normal to place it on the page 43 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Analog Indicators amp Controls continued Position the pointer at the left bottom side of the gradient rectangle using Zoom and Nudge or the Align tool Double Click on the Pointer Symbol to open the Symbol Properties form Click on the Slider Tab then click on the Vertical Tab on the right hand side Use the Insert button to insert the Pump_1_Speed tag Note that if the Continuous update of tag option is checked then the tag will be written to while it is being dragged In the At Maximum edit box type the height in pixels that you wrote down eallier Click OK Symbol Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Y Access El Tag Pump_1_Speed I n 4 eap IejozuoH Continuous update of tag Offset ot mts At 122 1 pixels maximum e EX up At 0 pixels minimum esl EN down Clear Prope
93. switching capacity AC 1 250 VA DC 120W Min permissible load 50 mA at 24 VDC operating frequency 60 operations min Note If the load is 5 A at 240 VAC the service life will be 40 000 times G9S CHARACTERISTICS omnon G9S Part number G9S 2001 G9S 301 G9S 501 G9S 321 T G9S 2002 Input voltage frequency 24 VDC 10 24 VDC 15 10 50 60 Hz 24 VAC 15 10 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz 120 VAC 15 10 50 60 Hz 240 VAC 15 10 50 60 Hz Fuse protection 0 4A Contact form of safety circuit DPST NO 3PST NO 5PST NO 5 Contact form of auxiliary circuit 5 5 5 5 5 5 Contact form of safety OFF delay circuit DPST NO Contact resistance 200 ma 300 mQ max measurement conditions 5 VDC 10 mA voltage drops Operate time Rated voltage operation 50 ms 300 ms max 300 ms Release time does not include bounce 50 ms 100 ms max 100 ms time OFF delay 1 s 105 305 Max switching Mechanical 1 800 operations hr frequency Rated load 1 800 operations hr Insulation resistance at 500 VDC 100 between control circuit and the safety auxiliary circuits between the safety circuits and auxiliary circuits and between safety circuits Rated insulation voltage 250 V P D 3 outside P D 2 inside IEC664 1 DIN VDE 0110 89 Rated impulse withstand voltage 4 kV Overvoltage category 3
94. tected Phase error de tected 451 a 10 a cl Some movement occurred at the beginning of opera tion Some movement occurred at the beginning of opera tion Encoder lines wired incor rectly Servomotor power lines wired incorrectly Encoder lines discon nected Connector contact faulty Correct the wiring Correct the wiring Insert the connectors cor rectly 4 15 Application Alarm Error content display a c3 Encoder A B phase wire dis connection a c4 Encoder S phase wire dis connection fig a Momentary power failure alarm cpf 00 Parameter Unit transmission er ror 1 cpfol Parameter Unit transmission er ror2 C 4 16 Condition when error oc curred Some movement occurred at the beginning of opera tion Some movement occurred at the beginning of opera tion Occurred when power was turned on Occurred while the Parame ter Unit was being used Probable cause Encoder lines discon nected Connector contact faulty Encoder lines wired incor rectly Encoder defective Servo Driver defective Encoder lines discon nected Connector contact faulty Encoder lines wired incor rectly Encoder defective Servo Driver defective A momentary power fail ure occurred The power supply was re started within the power retention period Servo Driver defective Internal element is malfun
95. the Replace with box Make sure Current Project is selected along with all search options checked Click Find ind and Repla x Find Replace Search options General Y Graphics Find Pump 1 CMD I 7 Code Files Reports Look in Current Project x Replace with Pump_1_Run Project Item Field Location Context First Tutorial MyPage Expression 218 Pump_1_CMD P lt lt Previous Tutorial MyPage Expression 224 Pump_1_CMD EM Tutorial MyPage Color AN 229 Pump 1 Tutorial MyPage Up Command 207 Togale Pump_1_CMD Tutorial Variable Tags 1 Pump 1 CMD I Remove Viewing 1 5 of 5 matches Export Go to Test Replace Replace all O Find Close Help The utility will display a list of all locations where the Pump_1_CMD tag is found Click Replace all Confirm the replace when prompted and if you still have the page open switch to the graphics builder to save changes to your page Congratulations You have completed the offline configuration portion of this tutorial The following sections show you how to configure the online portions of the project Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime gt Now it s time to run your project and test it to make sure that you have completed the tutorial correctly Use the back button at runtime to go back through the pages that you have Compile your project then Click on the
96. the power supply input currents for each motor and then add the current consumption for the number of shafts other controllers etc to make the selection The Servo Driver inrush current flows at a maximum of 50 A for 20 ms when 200 V is input With low speed no fuse breakers a inrush current 7 to 8 times the rated current flows for 0 1 second When mak ing the selection take into consideration the entire inrush current for the system e Surge Absorbers Use surge absorbers to absorb surges from power supply input lines due to lightning abnormal volt ages etc When selecting surge absorbers take into account the varistor voltage the amount of surge immunity and the amount of energy resistance For 200 VAC systems use a varistor voltage of 470 V The surge absorbers shown in the following table are recommended Varistor Max limit Surge Energy Fuse Type voltage voltage immunity resistance capacity Matsushita 775 V 1 250 A Disk un psv aso ws 51 775 V 2 500 A 80 J 3to 10A 775V 4 000 A 150 J 5to 15 A 500A Ishizuka Z10L471 773 V 1 000A Disk Electronics 2151471 5 38 1 250 20 Wes 2211471 733 V 3 000 510 10A Z25M4718 810 V 10 000 235 Okaya RAV 783 V 1 000 A Block Electric Ind 781BWZ 2A RAV 783 V 1 000 A 781BXZ 2A RAV 620 1 000 A 401 621BYR 2 2 23 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Note 1 The W Matsushita models are U
97. the regenerative energy per unit time 3 35 4 Chapter 4 Application 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Using Displays Protective and Diagnostic Functions Troubleshooting Periodic Maintenance Application Chapter 4 4 1 Using Displays 4 1 1 Display Functions OMRON U series AC Servomotors have unique servo software that enables quantita tive monitoring in real time on digital displays of changes in a variety of characteristics Use these displays for checking the various characteristics during operation m Servo Driver Displays There are two LED indicators on the Servo Driver itself One is for the power supply and another is for alarms Power supply indicator OMRON R88D UEPO4H ewe AC SERVO DRIVER Alarm indicator Symbol Name Power supply indicator Lit when AC power supply is normal Alarm indicator Ifthe alarm indicator is connect a Parameter Unit and check the contents of the alarm m Parameter Unit Displays When a Parameter Unit is connected monitoring can be conducted by means of a 5 digit 7 segment LED R88A PR02U Handy Type R88A PR03U Mounted Type omRon R88A PRO3U Display area 7 segment display MODE SET 4 2 Application Chapter 4 m Parameter Unit Key Functions The contents displayed by the Parameter Unit can be changed by key operations Handy type Mounted Parameter Unit Parameter Unit R88A PR02U R88A PR03U
98. times normal will flow to the capacitor in the noise filter The following table shows the noise filters that are recommended for motor output Rated Remarks current LF 310KA Three phase block noise filter LF 320KA ESD R 47B EMI core for radiation noise Fuji Electrochemical Co RN80UD 10 turn for radiation noise Note 1 The Servomotor output lines cannot use the same noise filters used for power supplies Note 2 Typical noise filters are used with power supply frequencies of 50 60 Hz If these noise filters are connected to outputs of 7 8 to 11 KHz the Servo Driver s PWM frequency a very large about 100 times larger leakage current will flow through the noise filter s condenser and the Servo Driver could be damaged 2 24 System Desien and Installation Chapter 2 e Surge Killers Install surge killers for loads that have induction coils such as relays solenoids brakes clutches etc The following table shows types of surge killers and recommended products Type Features _ Recommended products Diodes are relatively small devices such as relays used for loads when reset time is not an issue The reset time is increased because the surge voltage is the lowest when power is cut off Used for 24 48 VDC systems resistor Thyristor and varistor are used for loads when induction coils are large as in electromagnetic brakes solenoids etc and when reset time is an issue The surge voltage
99. two axes XW2B OImROn XW2B Application Examples m REDUCE WIRING TO EXTERNAL SENSORS SWITCHES AND POWER SUPPLY Conventional Method Requires Major Wiring Effort Position Control Module Servo Driver The connectors are soldered Switch Sensor Connector on the nnector on th i i Connector on the Servo Driver side Position Control Module side Servo Control Terminal Block All wires are connected to the Servo Control Terminal Block with ease Position Control Module Servo Terminal Block Servo Driver Power supply Switch Sensor Relays control signals between the Servo Driver and the Position Control Module with minimal wiring effort Connectors wired with a single screwdriver and no soldering is required Dedicated Cable connects Units XW2B omnon XW2B TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS Position Control Module Cable on the Position Control Servo Terminal Block Cable on the Servo Driver Servo Driver and COM1 Module side side see note 2 3 and 4 Position Control Module Cable for C200H NC112 Servo Terminal Block for seri seri i for one axis for C200H C200H NC112 U series Cable U series Servo Driver C200H NC112 XW2Z J A1 XW2B 20J6 1B see note 1 27 J B1 R88D UP Posit
100. type UE models 04 400 W 05 100 V type UE models 08 750W y 0 User specifications number hexadecimal display Application Chapter 4 4 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions 4 2 1 Alarm Displays and Alarm Code Outputs The Servo Driver has the error detection functions shown below When an error is de tected the alarm output ALM is output the Servo Driver s internal power drive circuit is turned off and the alarm is displayed m Alarm Table Dis Alarm Error detection play ALM function The checksum for the parameters read from the EEPROM does not match 404 Parameter setting error Incorrect parameter setting Overcurrent or overheating detected a31 OFF Deviation counter over The pulses remaining on the deviation counter exceed the devi flow ation counter overflow level 440 OFF Overvoltage Main circuit DC voltage exceeded the allowable value Detected at 4 950 r min EB M Detected at reverse limit characteristics when the output torque exceeds120 of the rated torque Runaway detected Faulty power or encoder wiring Phase error detected Connector not properly connected Encoder not properly wired Detection contents OFF acl OFF ac2 OFF ac3 OFF Encoder A or B phase wire disconnection Either Phase A or Phase B signal was disconnected or short cir cuited OFF Encoder S phase wire disconnecti
101. want this I O Device to link to an external tag database ix to externally linked tags V Automatic refresh of tags Live Update lt Back Cancel Help Es Express Communications Wizard The Communications Wizard will make the Following changes to the project Tutorial Using I O Server MyIOServer Creating Device Type Disk I O Device Manufacturer Citect Generic Protocol Model Citect Generic Protocol Communications Citect Generic Protocol Address RUN 10Dev CDK Press Finish to save this lt Back Cancel Help Your system has now been configured to access a disk based PLC to write and read data Now we need to configure the tags in this PLC that the system will use to control equipment In this tutorial we will be controlling a pump its mode and its speed Quickstart Tutorial 7 10 Configuring Tags gt Variable Tags a core building block for a CitectSCADA project Tags provide the link between the operator IMPORTANT and the real world We will create three tags to represent our pump a Run Stopped status tag an Auto Manual Do NOT press ENTER control tag and a Speed control tag before filling in all the required fields Each time you Making sure the Tutorial projectis selected click on the Tags folder Then Double Click press ENTER a new record on Variable Tags in the right hand pane will be added to the project creating duplic
102. wire them Note 3 Use mode 2 for origin search Note 4 Use a dedicated power supply 24 VDC for command pulse signals Note 5 ERB44 02 diodes by Fuji Electric or equivalent are recommended for surge absorption Note 6 Use the RUN signal to set whether the Servo can be turned ON OFF Note 7 Class 3 grounds must be to 100 Q or less Note 8 The Servo Relay Unit and Cables for the R88D UP cannot be used 6 3 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Connecting to SYSMAC C200H NC211 Position Control Unit with 5 VDC Power Supply MCCB Main circuit power supply MC f O OFF Mo R88D UEP J JL 5 MC Main circuit contact 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 5 gt SUP R88D UEPOIOH 2 Ix 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz z PL E 2 E T 6 66 d Class 3 ground R88D UEP AC Servomotor Driver C200H 211 CN 1 TB Contents No MUR i i R88M UEDOOODO Output power supply input 24 VDC 1 i Connect external Regen AC Servomotor 24 VDC i eration Unit as
103. wiring methods outlined below to improve encoder noise resistance Be sure to use dedicated encoder cables e If lines are interrupted the middle be sure to connect them with connectors making sure that the cable insulation is not peeled off for more than 50 mm In addition be sure to use shielded wire Donot coil cables If cables are long and are coiled mutual induction and inductance will increase and will cause malfunctions Be sure to use cables fully extended When installing noise filters for encoder cables use ferrite cores The following table shows the rec ommended ferrite core models EMI core ESD QR 25 1 Clamp filter ZCAT2032 0930 ZCAT3035 1330 ZCAT2035 0930A Do not wire the encoder cable in the same duct as power cables and control cables for brakes sole noids clutches and valves m Improving Control I O Signal Noise Resistance Position can be affected if control I O signals are influenced by noise Follow the methods outlined be low for the power supply and wiring Use completely separate power supplies for the control power supply especially 24 VDC and the external operation power supply In particular be careful not to connect two power supply ground wires Install a noise filter on the primary side of the control power supply For speed and torque command input lines be sure to use twisted pair shielded cable and connect both ends of the shield wire to ground If t
104. 0 Application Chapter 4 4 2 4 Alarm History Display Mode The Servo Driver stores the history of the 10 most recent alarms that have been gener ated The alarm history can be displayed by going into the alarm history display mode and using the Up and Down Keys To clear the alarm history setthe system check mode to 02 and press the MODE SET Key m Displaying the Alarm History 4 0 Error number Alarm history data 1 Confirm that the initial display is shown bb 2 Press the MODE SET Key to go to the alarm history display mode 3 Use the Up and Down Keys to go up and down through the error occurrence numbers and display the corresponding alarm history data The larger the error occurrence number the less recent the alarm is m Clearing Alarm History Data Alarm history data initialization is executed in the system check mode The items in parentheses in the following explanation indicate operations using the Handy type Parameter Unit 2 3 4 5 012 7 Indicates settings mode System check mode 16 Data CO To data display Alarm history data cleared Confirm that the initial display is shown bb Press the MODE SET Key to enter the settings mode Using the Up and Down Keys set parameter number
105. 0 a OFFF Hex Hex Nota las tensiones negativas 10V x tensi n de entrada lt 0 se almacenan en complemento a dos Entrada Absoluto Precisi n 0 5 del FS total 1 0 del FS 6 6 Especificaciones de las Salidas Anal gicas Elemento Especificaciones Se ales de Salida Salida en Tensi n Salida en Corriente Salida Anal gica Salida D A Registros en los que se Salida Anal gica 1 IR 236 almacenan las salidas Salida Anal gica 2 IR 237 anal gicas Configuraci n del dato Dato de 12 bits en Binario Dato de 11 bits en Binario 10 a 410 V F800 a 07FF Hex 0 a 20 mA 0000 a 07 Nota las tensiones negativas Hex 10V lt tensi n de entrada lt 0V se almacenan en complemento a dos Precisi n 23 2 0 a 55 C Total 0a55 C 1 0 del FS OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 24 7 CQM1H SCB41 7 CQM1H SCB41 7 1 Caracter sticas OMRON ELECTRONICS S A TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH COQMTH SCBA41 Tarjeta de comunicaciones serie Puerto RS 2320 Puerta RS 12 24 485 La Tarjeta Opcional CQM1H SCB41 se trata de otra de las nuevas tarjetas opcionales que se pueden utilizar con el CQM1H CPU51 61 que puede ser instalada nicamente en el slot 1 slot izquierdo de la CPU Esta tarjeta no puede ser instalada en el slot 2 slot derecho Esta tarjeta tiene dos puertos serie de comunicaciones de esta forma se puede incrementar f cilmente el n mero de
106. 0 max 1 The operation time measurement is the measured value with a surge killer CR50500 by Okaya Elec Specifications Chapter 5 5 2 3 Torque and Rotational Speed Characteristics m Torque Characteristics With 3 m Standard Cable and 200 VAC Input R88M UE10030H S1 R88M UE20030H S1 R88M UE40030H S1 UE10030V S1 UE20030V S1 UE40030V S1 N m kgf cm N m kgf cm Nm kgf cm Frequent use Frequent use Frequent use Continuous use Continuous use 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min 0 0 Continuous use 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min R88M UE75030H S1 UE75030V S1 N m kgf cm Frequent use Continuous use 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min m Torque Characteristics With 3 m Standard Cable and 100 VAC Input R88M UE10030L S1 R88M UE20030L S1 R88M UE30030L S1 UE10030W S1 UE20030W S1 UE30030W S1 N m kgf cm N m kgf cm N m kgf cm Frequent use Frequent use Continuous use Continuous use 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min 1000 2000 3000 4000 r min Servomotor and Mechanical System Temperature Characteristics U series Servomotors use rare earth magnets neodymium iron magnets The temperature co efficient for these magnets is approximately 0 13 C As the temperature drops the Servomotor s 5 25 Specifications Chapter 5 momentary maximum torque increases and as the temperature rises the Servomot
107. 1 R88M UE10030W BS1 Four R3 7 The key groove is in accordance with 30030 Shaft Edge Dimension JIS B1301 1976 8h6 dia Two 4 3 dia 2 12 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e 200 W 300 W 400 W Standard Models R88M UE20030V S1 R88M UE40030V S1 R88M UE20030W S1 R88M UE30030W S1 300 30 Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 Four 14h6 dia 5 5 dia Four R5 3 14h6 dia ds SS ESSS SS Sy Pupas e 200 W 300 W 400 W Models with Brake R88M UE20030V BS1 R88M UE40030V BS1 R88M UE20030W BS1 R88M UE30030W BS1 Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 300 30 14h6 dia 14h6 dia Four R5 3 RSS EERE OSOS a OSOS SS SS OSOS OSI OS Standard Models Standard Models with Brake Model L Model L Models LL LL R88M UE20030V S1 126 5 96 5 R88M UE20030V BS1 166 136 R88M UE20030W S1 R88M UE20030W BS1 R88M UE40030V S1 154 5 124 5 R88M UE40030V BS1 194 164 R88M UE30030 W S1 R88M UE30030W BS1 2 13 Chapter 2 The key groove is in accordance with Shaft Edge Dimension JIS B1301 1976 System Desien and Installation e 750 W Standard Models R88M UE75030V S1 16h6 dia 16h6 dia R8 2 Shaft Edge Dimension Four The key groove is in accordance with
108. 1 1976 Four 5 5 dia Four R5 3 14h6 dia 50h7 dia e 200 W 300 W 400 W Models with Brake R88M UE20030H BS1 R88M UE40030H BS1 R88M UE20030L BS1 R88M UE30030L BS1 300 30 Encoder adapter Motor plug Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 RS 14h6 dia 11 R88M UE20030H BS1 R88M UE20030L BS1 R88M UE40030H BS1 R88M UE30030L BS1 R88M UE20030H S1 R88M UE20030L S1 R88M UE40030H S1 R88M UE30030L S1 2 10 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e 750 W Standard Models R88M UE75030H S1 300430 Encoder adapter Motor plug Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 Four R8 2 E 2 30 5 90 dia 16h6 dia 70h7 dia e 750 W Models with Brake R88M UE75030H BS1 300 30 Encoder adapter Motor plug Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 Four 7 dia Four R8 2 16h6 dia 70h7 dia System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m AC Servomotors Conforming to EC Directives e 100 W Standard Models R88M UE10030V S1 R88M UE10030W S1 300 30 Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 8h6 dia 1 8 icc 1 mw 3 e 100 W Models with Brake R88M UE10030V BS
109. 1 218 2 elele Ses 18 e CSY_Display_Title EISE GU x wma 9 Your graphical configuration for this tutorial is now complete You can test this by running the project again and then continue to the following sections which address color management alarm handling and trending as well as customizing the navigation menu and Administration Tools If you d like to practice the skills you have just learned try adding a bar graph to the tank to indicate level you can add a slider to simulate a level transmitter 53 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Managing True Colors CitectSCADA comes with two excellent tools for adjusting colors making it very easy to manipulate images from shades of red to green to yellow and so on even for very complex true color images We will manipulate a simple image in this example but the same principles apply to any true color image that you create or import to the application Click on the left hand Tank symbol to select it Redo Ctrl Y Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Paste Special Insert ActiveX Control Insert Process Analyst Insert Database Exchange Delete Del Duplicate Ctrl D Select All Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl H Cut Link Paste Symbol gt F6 Paste Symbol Flashing Paste Genie Fil Copy to Library Attach Super Genie
110. 100 to 750 W Pulse train Inputs Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Al ways heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in inju ry to people or damage to the product NDANGER Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury NWARNING Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury N Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products of ten means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interes
111. 24651 1 Pulling tool 724668 2 Motor Side Connector plug model 172167 1 Nippon Amp Connector pin contact model 170359 1 Nippon Amp for 100 W use 170360 1 Nippon Amp for 200 to 750 W use m Power Cable for Servomotors With Brakes Non conforming Models e Types of Cable Model Length L Outer diameter of sheath 68 R88A CAU010B R88A CAU015B R88A CAU020B Up to a maximum of 20 m between the Monitor and the Servo Driver e Connection Configuration OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver e Wiring Symbol No Nw Bd U phase 1 TIO oa 5 AWG20 White W phase 3 AWG20 Blue GR 4 AWG20 Green Brak 5 AWG20 Black e Brake 6 AWG20 Black Cable AWG20 x 6C Crimp style terminal UL2517 5 35 Specifications Chapter 5 Cable Side Connector housing model 172160 1 Nippon Amp Connector socket contact model 170366 1 Nippon Amp Crimping tool 724651 1 Pulling tool 724668 2 Motor Side Connector plug model 172168 1 Nippon Amp Connector pin contact model 170359 1 Nippon Amp for 100 W use 170360 1 Nippon Amp for 200 to 750 W use m Power Cable for Servomotors Without Brakes Models Conforming to EC Directives e Types of Cable Model Length L Outer diameter of sheath R88A CAUOO1 Note 1 Power cables will be cut to the specified length in 1 m increments Note 2
112. 5 m NT2S SF121 NT2S CN223 2 m NT2S SF122 123 NT2S CN224 2 m Reference Information CPM2C CPU and Expansion I O XW2B XW2C 20 pin Screw Terminal Blocks CPM2C Connector type CPM2C LIC 1 DTC D CPU Units with 16 pt DC IN 16 pt NPN OUT CPM2C LIE D TC Expansion 1 Modules with 16 pt DC IN 16 pt NPN OUT OUTPUT I m 2 cables required for each module EISEEISEEEEEEIEEESISEEEIE I pido i XW22 100A 1 m XW2Z 150A 1 5 m 22 200 2 m XW2B 20G4 XW22 300A 3 m XW2Z 500A 5 m INPUT k XW2C 20G5 IN16 XW2B 20G5 XW2B 20G4 Dedicated input screw terminal block Reference Information CPM2C CPU and Expansion I O G70A G70D Relay I O Blocks CPM2C Connector type CPM2C LIC 1 DTC D CPU Units with 16 pt DC IN 16 pt NPN OUT CPM2C LIE D TC Expansion I O Modules with 16 pt DC IN 16 pt NPN OUT G70D VSOC16 I OUTPUT o o ojolo ojo Slo o o o o o opp ooo O O O O S I I 2 cables are required for each module 70 20 16 3 I G79 100C 1 m G2R 1 S N relays I G79 150C 1 5 m I G79 200C 2 m I G79 300C 3 m I G79 500C 5 m I I
113. 60 E1 2 Operation Manual Multi vendor Connection 16 Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 Communicates via AB s DF1 protocol Connect the communication cable from the NT to a serial port on the PLC using Omron cable part numbers AB SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 E NT31 Port A NT631 Port A or B Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 NT31C CN321 EU This cable can only be used in 1 1 connection with DH485 port AB SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 NT31 Port A azia NT631 Port or B NT31 Port B E NT631C CN211 485 14 LT I NT631C CN211 485 NT31 Port AB SLC 5 02 Communication Cables and Accessories NT31C CN321 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 9 pin NT to AB SLC PLC NT631C CN321 EU 3 0 m cable 9 to 9 pin NT to AB SLC PLC V060 E1 2 Operation Manual Multi vendor Connection GE 90 20 and 90 30 Series PLCs Communicates via GE s SNP X protocol The Omron NT is communicating RS 232 while the GE PLC uses RS 422 An RS232 to RS422 converter HE693SNP232A is needed to complete communications GE 90 20 and 90 30 Series E NT31 Port A NT631 Port or NT31C CN322 EU E GE 90 20 and 90 30 Series Communication Cables and Accessories NT31 Port B NT31C CN322 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 9 pin NT to GE PLC NT631C CN322 EU 3 0 m cable 9 to 9 pin NT to GE PLC HE693SNP232A RS232 to RS422 adapt
114. 88D UP cannot be used 6 5 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Connecting to SYSMAC 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 Position Control Unit MCCB Main circuit power supply MC RO 66 OFF ON 9 0 5 Main circuit contact P SUP i 8 lt PL eit v TO OO gt Class 3 ground R88D UEP AC Servomotor Driver 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 Terminal IB Contents CN 1 R 12 to 24 VDC ESA eee Connect external Regen Servat B 24 VDC x1 eration Unit as required CWlmt gt o 0 0 O 14 RUN N Red R88A CAULILILIS CCW limit B RESET U et Cable N Emergency stop 3 A 35 ALMCOM Blue Cy External interrupt B 34 w Green ms Origin 4 24 VDC Salk w Origin proximity B u Local bod Redy CN2 5 5D 0 RE 5 VDC 8 124 T 22 E B The 1 cw R88A CRUOOOC S W LA 2 cw Encoder Cable 3 ow 9 Bam 3 CCW n COWES A 4 CCW amp cow 10 p rr 5 ECRST 6 ECRST esc Shel FG R88A CPU General purpose
115. AC Units Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 VAC 50 60 Hz Main circuit DC output When using multiple axes and there is excessive regenerative energy the terminals can be connected together and the terminals can be connected together to increase the regeneration absorption capacity U Servomotor U These are the terminals for outputs to the Servomotor phase output V Servomotor V White phase output W Servomotor W Blue phase output terminal ter ground 5 7 Specifications Chapter 5 m CN1 Control I O Specifications e CN1 Control Input HmNe Sgnimme Commis PULS CW A Feed pulse reverse pulse Line driver input 6 mA at 3V 90 differential phase Open collector input 15 mA at 5V PULS CW A CW A pulse A phase Switched between feed pulse and direction signal SIGN Direction signal forward reverse pulse and forward pulse and 90 differential CCW B pulse 90 differential phase pulse A and B phases using bits 3 4 and 5 SIGN phase pulse B phase of the Cn 02 setup parameter CCW B Maximum frequency 200 kpps ECRST Deviation counter reset Line driver input 6 mA at 3V ON Disables command input and resets deviation counter Operation can be switched between a status signal high level and a differential signal rising edge us ing bit A in setup parameter Cn 02 perpe 13 24VIN 12 to 24 V power supply Power supply for pin
116. Admin Tools from under the Tools menu If you are not courses MyPage logged in the menu options will be greyed out and inaccessible Pages Trends Alarms Tools Admin Tools B k Tag Debug gt If required login as the Administrator as shown previously using either the kernel user or a Windows Administrator user Once logged in with the appropriate privilege level the Admin Tool menu will change color to blue and become accessible As well as access to common applications and file management tools this page also allows access to System Setup The Computer Setup Wizard runtime and communications statistics and online menu configuration Tools a fess lt Pages Trends Alarms Tools Admin 0 0 0000 m 28 0 Windows Applications Citect Configuration System Information 8 Windows Explorer Tu Explorer Internet Explorer Citect Ini 4g Notepad System Setup EY Wordpad El Configure Menu Free Disk 21102 MB an Paint Configure Trend Groups E Calculator A Configure Alarm Groups 38 Runtime Manager Citect Information Memory 1125 MB Trend Clients Citect Version 7 10 232 Alarm Clients Service Pack Citect Kernel System Hardware Np General Window IM IO Device Stats Y Statistics Window Tag Debug W Reset Statistics Y Debug Report Clients 10 Server MylOServer Y Debug Off Maximum Read Request Y Dump Kernel 48 syslog Dat Average Read Physical Min
117. Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution 2 2 Do not stand on the product or put heavy objects on the product Doing so may result in an injury Make sure that the product is well ventilated and the interior ofthe product is free of foreign matter Not doing so may result in a fire Mount the product properly Not doing so may result in a product malfunction Keep the specified distance between the Servo Driver and the interior surface ofthe control panel or any other machine Not doing so may result in a fire or Servomotor malfunction Protect the product from excessive shock Not doing so may result in a product mal function Wire the system correctly Not doing so may result in an out of control Servomotor and injury Tighten mounting screws terminal screws and cable connector screws firmly Loose screws may result in a product malfunction Use crimp terminals when wiring Connecting bare twisted wires directly to terminals may result in fires Use the power supply voltages specified in this manual Incorrect voltages may damage the product Take steps to ensure that the rated power supply voltage is maintained in locations with poor power supply conditions Improper power supply voltages may damage the product Install safety measures such as circuit breakers to protect against shorts in external wiring Insufficient safety measures may result in fires Install a safety stop on each ma
118. GU A R PIDA DE TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL ESTE MANUAL CONTIENE 1 INTRODUCCI N 2 41 3 COM1H PLB21 4 21 5 41 6 42 7 8 41 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 1 1 Introducci n TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 1 Introducci n En esta gu a r pida se van a tratar las diferentes Tarjetas Opcionales que existen para el CQM1H su conexi n funcionamiento y modo de operaci n Las tarjetas opcionales que se tienen son las siguientes CQM1H CTB41 Tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad CQM1H PLB21 Tarjeta de E S de Pulsos CQM1H ABB21 Tarjeta de Encoder Absoluto CQM1H AVB41 Tarjeta de Selectores Anal gicos 1 42 Tarjeta de E S Anal gicas CQM1H SCB41 Tarjeta Serie de Comunicaciones Comboard Las tarjetas opcionales s lo se pueden utilizar en el 51 y en el CQM1H CPU61 oom H CPLIET6 Hume para tasa 1 T Hace para tajali 2 izquierda derecha Izquierda Derecha Tarjeta de Contador Entradas de Pulsos contador de alta CQM1H CTB41 51 51 de Alta Velocidad velocidad 4 puntos 50KHz 500KHz seleccionable Salidas Externas 4 puntos Tarjeta de E S de Entradas de Pulsos Contador de Alta CQM1H PLB21 Pulsos Velocidad 2 puntos de una fase 50 KHz diferencia de fase 25 KHz Salida de Pulsos 2 puntos 50 KHz Especificaciones Referencia En
119. Graphics Builder m Restore Move Minimize Maximize Shutdown Explorer Graphics Builder Project Editor Cicode Editor About FullScreen Select the grey rectangle you have already created and copy it by dragging it and holding the Ctrl key down on your keyboard alternatively use standard windows copy and paste controls Position it to the left of the existing rectangle and drag the resize nodes to change it to a tall narrow rectangle as shown below Use the Zoom and nudge Align or Grid tool to precisely position the Rectangle in line with the existing rectangle Double click the rectangle to access the rectangle properties form Select the Appearances tab on the horizontal tabs and the General tab on the vertical tabs Change the Filled Color to bright green Check the Gradient Fill option and select bright red as the Gradient Color From the pull down options change the Gradient Direction to vertical 41 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Analog Indicators amp Controls continued Rectangle Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Slider Access Line Object type Width 1 u e Style Solid 54 Corner a Color Radus 19 Fill Gradient Filled E Color Gradient Fill cle Direction Cancel Apply Help Once finished configu
120. Historian AMPLA and Plant2Business are registered trademarks of Citect Pty Ltd Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other brand or product names may be trademarks of their respective holders Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Definition of Terms Click Double Click Right Click Check Type Text Drag Alt Tab 4 gt v Briefly press left mouse button Press left mouse button twice quickly Briefly press right mouse button tick cross options box the Text Position mouse click hold left mouse button move mouse then release mouse button Press the Alt key hold it down then press the Tab key Single Click Right Click Double Click Click and drag Type Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 CitectHMI SCADA is made up of a several configuration tools and a runtime section Citect Explorer Top level configuration interface Citect Project Editor Mainly used for entering database type information Citect Draw Used for creating graphics a d Z Citect Runtime Provides the active operator interface You can switch between these applications by E Using the icons at the top left of each application or m Holding down the Alt key then pressing Tab until the application you want is selected then release the alt key Alt Tab or 3 Clicking on the icons that appear on the Windows ta
121. If two axis control is used the external input and Servo Driver wiring must be done in the same way for the Y axis Note 7 Use the RUN signal to set whether the Servo can be turned ON OFF Note 8 Class 3 grounds must be to 100 Q or less Note 9 The Servo Relay Unit and Cables for the R88D UP cannot be used 6 4 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Connecting to SYSMAC C200H NC211 Position Control Unit with 24 VDC Power Supply MCCB Main circuit power supply MC R 0 6 OFF ON A R88D UEPODL 5 eee 00 Main circuit contact 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz i R88D UEPODH 2 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 l Class 3 ground R88D UEPT AC Servomotor Driver C200H NC211 CN 1 TB Contents No R IAE 8 Output power supply input 24 VDC 1 eed t Sa Ge aes AC Servomotor Output power supply 0 V 23 N am 8 1 Cw U m Power Cable HA X axis pulse CW with resistance 2 r 2 CW v ES Y Ww output CW without resistance 3 oe 3 CCW
122. J Record Linked No The Project Editor is mainly for editing database type information The Variable Tags Database has one record for each Tag you define Each Tag has multiple fields Variable Tag name Data Type Address etc You can see the record number indicated in the bottom left of the dialog box Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Tags continued S W BCD BYTE DIGITAL INT LONG LONGBCD REAL STRING UINT ULONG Next you will configure three tags as shown below Remember to fill in the form before pressing Add or Enter Use the Tab key or the mouse to move between fields To make corrections after you have pressed add you can move to the Tag or record by using the scroll bars on CAUTION Where a drop down is provided you should use it If you mistype data into fields that require specific settings you may cause compile errors the right hand side then press Replace when you have made the changes The cursors have been added as a guide to show you where you should type and where you should click El Variable Tags Tutorial Variable Name Cluster Name Address Raw Zero Scale Eng Zero Scale Eng Units Deadband Comment Pump 1 cw MyCluster Pump 1 command on off I I O Device Name IODev DIGITAL gt Raw Full Scale Eng Full Scale Format Replace Delete Help Record 1 Linked No I
123. J load inertia x10 4 kgem R88D UEP04H UEP04V 13 3 1 2 Rotor inertia x 30 4 500 r min 100 W R88D UEPO8H UEPO8V 23 9 3 69 Rotor inertia x 30 3 000 r min 200 W R88D UEP12H UEP12V 21 1 3 8 Rotor inertia x 20 3 000 r min 400 W 750 W Note 1 The input voltage is the value at 200 VAC As the input voltage is increased the amount of regenerative energy that can be absorbed is decreased Note 2 For Servomotors with brakes add the brake inertia to the load inertia Note 3 This is the applicable range for the horizontal shaft No external force should be applied 3 30 Operation Chapter 3 e 100 VAC Input Type Model Absorptive regen Maximum applicable Remarks see note 3 eration energy J load inertia 10 4 kg m R88D UEP10L UEP10W 13 3 Rotor inertia x 30 4 500 r min 100 W 1 2 i R88D UEP12L UEP12W 23 9 3 69 Rotor inertia x 30 3 000 r min 200 W R88D UEP15L UEP15W 99 5 3 8 Rotor inertia x 20 4 500 r min 300 W Note 1 The input voltage is the value at 100 VAC As the input voltage is increased the amount of regenerative energy that can be absorbed is decreased Note 2 For Servomotors with brakes add the brake inertia to the load inertia Note 3 This is the applicable range for the horizontal shaft No external force should be applied m Range for Absorbing Regenerative Energy The relationship between rotational speed and the load inertia that can be absorbed by a Servo Driv
124. L and CSA certified Note 2 Refer to manufacturers documentation for operating details Note 3 The surge immunity is for a standard impulse current of 8 20 us If pulses are wide either decrease the current or change to a larger capacity surge absorber Note 4 The energy resistance is the value for 2 ms It may not be possible to retard high energy pulses at less than 700 V In that case absorb surges with an insulated transformer or reactor e Noise Filters for Power Supply Input Use a noise filter to attenuate extraneous noise and to diminish noise radiation from the Servo Driver Selecta noise filter with a load current of at leasttwice the rated current The following table shows noise filters that reduce by 40 dB noise between 200 kHz and 30 MHz Maker Model Rated current Remarks For single phase To attenuate noise at frequencies of 200 kH or less use an insulated transformer and a noise filter For high frequencies of 30 MHz or more use a ferrite core and a high frequency noise filter with a through type capacitor e Noise Filters for Motor Output Use noise filters without built in capacitors on the Servomotor output lines Output lines cannot use the same noise filters as the power supply General purpose noise filters are made for a power supply fre quency of 50 60 Hz ifthey are connected to an output of 7 8to 11 kHz the Servo Driver PWM frequen an extremely large leakage current approx 100
125. Limit switches 51 51 Feedback Starter switch 7 loop 52 12 KM1 K3 NC 52 KM2 K3 NO K1 and K2 NO K1 and K2 NO K4 and K5 NO bakes K4 and K5 7 OFF delay 1 and 2 timer KM1 and KM2 5 K4 4 Operation instruction Motor rotation OFF delay time Nm S1 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanis D4D and D4B Motor controller S2 Starter switch KM1 and KM2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor 11 7 wawa Bof Operation instruction 11 G9S omnon G9S G9S 301 24 VDC WITH 2 CHANNEL AUTO RESET LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Dimensions Unit mm inch 95 2001 095 2002 12 Timing Chart Limit switches S1 and S2 NC Limit switches S1 and S2 NO K3 NC K3 NO K1 and K2 NO K1 and K2 NO 1 2 1 2 51 Limit switch S2 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanism D4D and D4B KM1 and 2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor
126. MNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver e Wiring Symbol No 55000005 No Symbol A 1 AWG24 blue o 16 At A o AWG24 white blue A 17 A Bs 3 AWG24 yellow o 18 B 5 2 white yellow 2 A 19 B S 2 S g Awezs white green X 15 S EOV 7 AWG22 black 1 EOV 8 e 4 ESV FG 9 renato 20 FG Cable AWG22 AWG24 012589 Cable Side Connector housing model 172161 1 Nippon Amp Connector socket contact model 170365 1 Nippon Amp Crimping tool 724649 1 Pulling tool 724668 2 Connector plug model 10120 3000VE Sumitomo 3M Connector case model 10320 52A0 008 Sumitomo 3M 5 32 Specifications Chapter 5 Motor Side Connector plug model 172169 1 Nippon Amp Connector pin contact model 170359 1 Nippon Amp m Encoder Cables for Models Conforming to EC Directives e Types of Cable Model Length L Outer diameter of sheath R88A CRUD003C 8 dia R88A CRUD005C R88A CRUD010C R88A CRUD015C R88A CRUD020C Up to a maximum of 20 m between the Monitor and the Servo Driver e Connection Configuration OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver
127. OT press ENTER before filling in all the required fields in a form Each time you press ENTER a new record will be added to the project creating duplicates which will cause compilation failures Similarly make sure you only single click the Add button rather than double clicking otherwise duplicate records will be added causing complication failures For learners it is better to use the Add button instead of the ENTER key If you add an extra record by mistake you can use the Delete button to mark it for deletion Once marked for deletion the record will be ignored If you press delete by mistake you can press it again to undelete To view records marked for deletion go to Tools select Options and check Show Deleted Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Clusters continued In the Network Addresses form enter the Name MyAddress the Address 127 0 0 1 and an appropriate Comment Name MyAddress I Address 127 001 Comment Quickstart loopback TCPIP address Add op Replace Delete Help Record 1 When you are finished click Add then close the form This assigns the loopback TCP IP address to the system which is appropriate for Standalone systems only We will then use that address for our server roles We now need to assign both the Cluster and the Network Address to the various server roles that are required on this Citect system This includes IO Communications Alarming T
128. RESET Alarm reset Mode switching data memory Servo ON OFF during jog operations Switching between parameter display and data display data memory m Types of Modes There are four types of modes for Parameter Unit displays The functions in each mode are shown inthe following table Status display mode Bit display indicating internal status via indicators Power supply ON display base block positioning completed rotation detection and command pulse input Symbol display indicating internal status via 3 digit 7 segment display Base block operating forward rotation prohibited reverse rotation prohibited alarm display Settings mode System check Jog operations alarm history data clear motor parameters check auto tuning Setting and checking setup parameters Setting and checking user parameters Monitor mode Speed feedback torque commands number of pulses from U phase electrical angle internal status bit display command pulse speed position deviation and input pulse counter Alarm history display Displays contents of alarms that have been previously generated up to a maximum mode of 10 4 3 Application Chapter 4 m Changing the Mode Use the MODE SET Key to change from one mode to another Co CO Stat
129. Select varistor voltage as follows coils are large as in electromagnetic brakes solenoids 24 VDC system varistor 39 V etc and when reset time is an issue The surge voltage 100 VDC system varistor 200 V when power is cut off is approximately 1 5 times that of 100 VAC system varistor 270 V the varistor 200 VAC system varistor 470 V Use capacitors and resistors for vibration absorption of Okaya Electric Ind resistor surge when power is cut off The reset time can be CR 50500 0 5 uF 50 Q shortened by proper selection of the capacitor or resis CRE 50500 0 5 uF 50 tor S2 A 0 0 2 uF 500 Q Note Thyristors and varistors are made by the following companies Refer to manufacturers documentation for operating details Thyristors Ishizuka Electronics Co Varistors Electronics Co Matsushita Electric Parts e Contactors When selecting contactors take into consideration the circuit s inrush current and the momentary maxi mum current The Servo Driver inrush current is 50 A and the momentary maximum current is approxi mately twice the rated current The following table shows the recommended contactors Rated current Momentary maxi Coil voltage mum current OMRON J7AN E3 120 A 24 VDC e Leakage Breakers Select leakage breakers designed for inverters Since switching operations take place inside the Servo Driver high frequency current leaks from the armature of the Servomotor With inverter leakag
130. Stepped Click OK to see the effect on your Process Analyst view and close the properties window Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime Process Analyst continued Finally resize the Object pane to maximize the graph pane while still showing the list of pens Process Analyst i P Pages Trends Alarms Tools Admin O m o Buren 9 10 22 2008 09 15 26 305 1 10 Minutes ze el amp aG3 5 P 10 22 2008 09 25 26 305 J Object Tree Scale Engineering Units Cursorl EPanel zz s I ss Z ZI Pump 1 mode 3 Off Unacknowledged Your Process Analyst view is now complete but before you leave the page click on the Save id button This will allow you to save the Process Analyst configuration you have just entered and retrieve it again later on Fill in the file name and click Save This will allow 8 Save Process Analyst View you to return to this view quickly at a later time Save in C3 Local E S Be using the Load View button Name Date modif Type Size This folder is empty I File name Pump Save as type Process Analyst Views pay Cancel 2 69 70 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Administrative Tools CitectSCADA Kernel and CitectSCADA comes with a number of commonly used administrative and debugging tools built into its default other advanced debugging menu utilities are covered in the CitectSCADA training Select
131. The maximum distance between the Servomotor and the Servo Driver is 20 m e Connection Configuration OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver e Wiring AC Servomotor AC Servo Driver Red AWG20 Red U phase U White AWG20 White V phase V Blue i AWG20 Blue W phase r Green Yellow AWG20 Green gu GR Cable AWG20 x 4C UL2517 5 36 Specifications Chapter 5 m Power Cable for Servomotors With Brakes Models Conforming to EC Directives Mode Length L Outer diameter of sheath R88A CAU01B Note 1 Power cables will be cut to the specified length in 1 m increments Note 2 The maximum distance between the Servomotor and the Servo Driver is 20 m e Connection Configuration OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver e Wiring AC Servomotor AC Servo Driver Red AWG20 Red U phase White AWG20 White V phase 1 V Blue AWG20Blue W phase i W Green Yellow AWG20 Green m ae E Red AWG 20 Black Brake Black AWG20 Black e T Cable AWG20 x 6C 24 VDC gt 10 UL2517 no polarity 5 37 Specifications Chapter 5 5 4 Parameter Unit Specifications m General Specifications x hm Stdads
132. Toronto 416 286 6465 Kitchener 519 896 1144 Kingston 613 376 3968 Quebec Montreal 514 636 6676 British Columbia Vancouver 604 522 8855 Alberta Edmonton 403 440 0818 Calgary 403 257 3095 Sao Paulo 55 11 5564 6488 Cono Sur 54 114 787 1129 Florida 954 227 2121 MEXICO SALES OFFICE MEXICO Mexico D F 555 534 1195 Monterrey N L 818 377 4281 2002 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in the U S A omnon Position Control Terminal Block XW2B Simplify Wiring between Motor Controls and Omron s Position Control PLC Modules m Relays control signals between a servo driver and the PLC position control module or CQM1 PLC with built in pulse I O capability Connectors are wired with a single screwdriver and no soldering is required m Dedicated cables connect terminal blocks to position control modules m Requires 24 VDC for control signal use m Terminal block organizes wiring and saves space uses M3 screws B Mounts to DIN track or with screws for panel mounting Ordering Information POSITION CONTROL TERMINAL BLOCKS Appearance Applicable servo driver Applicable position control Part number module CQM1 CPU U series R88D UP C200H NC112 XW2B 20J6 1B C200HW NC113 C200H NC211 XW2B 40J6 2B C200HW NC213 C200HW NC413 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 XW2B 20J6 3B XW2B omnon XW2B CABLES Cables Between Servo Driver and Te
133. V 4 d gitos de menor peso almacena despu s de cada PV 4 d gitos de mayor Ciclo Contador 3 PV 4 d gitos de menor peso Nota la forma de almacenar LEE C RE E d A PV 4 d gitos de mayor peso PV en Hex o en BCD se Contador 4 PV 4 d gitos de menor Puede especificar el PV 4 d gitos de mayor peso SUP 0 6602 a 661 1 IR 208 IR 240 Resultado de la Comparaci n Salidas Contiene el bit especificado Contador 1 Contador 1 Internas Bits 00 a 07 por el operando de CTBL 63 IR 209 IR 241 cuando se cumple una Contador 2 Contador 2 condici n IR 211 IR 243 Contador 4 Contador 4 cuando se cumple una condici n Flag de Operaci n de Cuenta 0 Parado 1 Operando 13 Flag de Comparaci n Indica si una comparaci n est o no en progreso 0 Parado 1 Operando 5 IR 210 IR 242 08a 11 Resultado de la Comparaci n Bits para las Contiene el bit especificado Contador 3 Contador 3 Salidas Externas 1 a 4 por el operando de CTBL 63 Flag de Overflow Underflow del PV Indica si se ha producido o no un Overflow o Underflow 0 Normal 1 Oveflow o Underflow 1 Flag de Error del SV 0 Normal 1 Error de Configuraci n OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 4 2 COM1H CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL tm o mm Stri Slot2 IR 212 AR 05 00 de Reset del Contador 2 Reset por Fase Z y Software 0 No Reset con Fase Z
134. a 50 KHz 100 Hz a 50 KHz 91 6 Hz 1 5 KHz Salida 10 Hz a 20 KHz 5 9 KHz para motor paso a paso Saltos de 1010Hz 10Hz Frecuencia de Salida Factor de oe de 50 Fijo 1a99 oe N mero de Pulsos 1 16777215 de Salida Rango de 10 Hz a 2 KHz cada 4 08 ms Aceleraci n Deceler aci n OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 15 4 COMIH ABB21 4 21 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH COMTH ABBZ1 Tarjeta interfaz de encoder absoluto Conector CM1 Entrada de ari coder absoluto 1 Conector Entrada de ar coder absolute 2 Se trata de una Tarjeta Opcional de Encoder Absoluto que cuenta dos entradas de pulsos en c digo binario gray desde un encoder absoluto ABS a trav s de los puertos 1 y 2 a un m ximo de 4KHz de frecuencia La Tarjeta Opcional CQM1H ABB21 es exactamente igual que los puertos de Entrada de Encoder Absoluto que incorporaba el 1 CPUAA Se comporta del mismo modo se programa y pone en marcha de la misma forma y tienen las mismas caracter sticas Modos de Operaci n Modo BCD y Modo 360 Resoluciones Se puede configurar una de las siguientes 8 bits 0 a 255 10 bits 0 a 1023 o 12 bits 0 a 4095 La resoluci n deber a coincidir con la que tenga el encoder que se conecte Interrupciones Se puede ejecutar una subrutina de interrupci n cuando el PV Valor Presente del contador absoluto de alta velocidad
135. a rectangle around your buttons and lights Once the rectangle is positioned you can easily resize it by clicking and dragging the bounding boxes in each corner and the center of each side D TIP Windows XP style buttons have a grey border around the button If you do not want a grey background for your buttons it is suggested that you uncheck the XP Style option under the Appearances tab of your buttons Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Formatting with Rectangles continued Os When the Rectangle Properties dialog popup appears change the Style to Solid the Corner Radius to Lu 4 the Line Color to Grey and the Fill Color to grey as shown below created you can click and drag the node points 1 per Rectangle Properties sz corner and 1 per side to Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access modify its size and shape Line Object type Width 1 E TE Holding the Ctrl key down while sizing a rectangle or oval forces the object to have the same vertical and spay3 de jeuauag Style Solid Y Corner Color Radius 4 gt lt horizontal dimensions This z allows you to easily create Filed Gradient Fill squares and circles Color Color respectively rather than ectangle Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access Effect
136. a torque of 0 78 to 1 18 8 to 12 kgfecm or the G9S may malfunction or generate heat External inputs connected to T11 and T12 or T21 and T22 of the G9S 301 must be no voltage contact inputs PE is a ground terminal When a machine is grounded at the positive the PE terminal should not be grounded MOUNTING MULTIPLE UNITS If the output current is 3 A or more make sure that there is a minimum distance of 50 mm 1 97 in each between all adjacent G9S Units 24 VDC models do not require this spacing 50 mm min 1 97 FUSE REPLACEMENT Three and Five pole Models The power input circuit of the G9S includes a fuse to protect the 995 from damage that may be caused by short circuiting The fuse is mounted to the side panel Use the following type of fuse as a replacement Littel Fuse 218 4 rated current 0 4 A IEC127 approval Use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the fuse cover Be sure to turn off the G9S before replacing the fuse OMRON G9S APPLICABLE SAFETY CATEGORY EN954 1 All G9S series Relays fall under Safety Category 4 of EN954 1 except the G9S 32I T G9S 2001 The G9S 32I T has an OFF delay output block falling under Safety Category 3 and G9S 2001 falls under Safety Category 1 The above is provided according to circuit examples presented by OMRON Therefore the above may not apply to all operating environments The appli
137. active exposure Locations close to power lines Operation and Adjustment Precautions N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Confirm the settings of all parameters to be sure they are correct before starting ac tual operation Incorrect parameters may damage the product Do not make extreme changes in the settings of the product Doing so may result in unstable operation of the product and injury Confirm the operation of the motor before connecting it to the mechanical system Unexpected motor operation may result in injury If an alarm is ON remedy the cause make sure the system is safe reset the alarm and restart the system Not doing so may result in an injury The system may restart abruptly when power is resupplied after an instantaneous power failure Take safety measures to prevent accidents that may result in an injury Do notuse the built in brake of the Servomotor for normal control of the Servomotor Doing so may result in a Servomotor malfunction Maintenance and Inspection Precautions N Caution N Caution After replacing a Unit always transfer all data required for operation before attempt ing to restart operation Improper data settings may damage the product Do not disassemble or repair the product Doing so may result in an electric shock and injury Warning Labels Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration Be sure to
138. adjusted A large radial load may also be applied as a result of belt vibration Attach a brace and adjust Servo Driver gain so that belt vibration is minimized Pulley 1 Belt Tension Motor shaft Load shaft Make adjustable e Water and Drip Resistance Servomotor does not have water proof structure Except for the connector areas the protec tive structure is covered by the following JEM The Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association standards Non conforming Models IP 42 EC Directive Models IP 44 except shaft penetration point Ifthe Servomotor is used in an environment which condensation occurs water may enter inside of the encoder from the end surfaces of cables due to motor temperature changes Either take mea sures to ensure that water cannot penetrate in this way or use water proof connectors Even when machinery is not in use water penetration can be avoided by taking measures such as keeping the motor in servo lock status to minimize temperature changes If machining oil with surfactants e g coolant fluids or their spray penetrate inside of the motor in sulation defects or short circuiting may occur Take measures to prevent machining oil penetration e Other Precautions Do not apply commercial power directly to the Servomotor The Servomotors run on synchronous AC and use permanent magnets Applying 3 phase power will burn out the motor coils Do not car
139. an electric shock Be sureto ground the FG terminals of the Servomotor and Servo Driver Not doing so may result in an electric shock Do not connect or disconnect the front cover terminal cover Parameter Unit or peripheral devices while power is being supplied to the product Doing so may result in an electric shock Make sure that the product is operated maintained or inspected by authorized people only Not doing so may result in an electric shock Do not be wire or inspect the product within five minutes after power to the product is turned off Doing so may result in an electric shock Do not damage press or put excessive stress or heavy objects on the cables Doing so may result in an electric shock Do not touch the rotating part of the Servomotor in operation Doing so may result in an injury Do not modify the product Doing so may damage the product Use the Servomotor in proper combination with the Servo Driver Not doing so may result in a fire or damage to the Servomotor or Servo Driver Do not store or install the product in the following locations Doing so may result in fire or damage to the product Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures beyond the specified ranges Locations subject to humidities beyond the specified ranges Locations subject to rapid changes in temperature and possible condensation Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Location
140. and the pipe properties form is displayed Select a pipe highlight color of light grey and a width of 12 and then click OK to close the pipe properties form Pipe Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Slider Access E o Line 2 9 Width 12 a Highlight color X Lowlight color Cancel Help 50 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps amp Piping continued To adjust the pipe select it by clicking on it The ends and bends of the pipe will have small nodes shown which can be clicked on and dragged to reposition them Bounding boxes allow the dimensions of the pipe to be adjusted and will scale the pipe accordingly and will not adjust the width of the pipe Carefully manipulate your pipe to align with the outlet of the tank and feed into the pump approximately halfway through its radius Repeat this process to create another pipe on the left hand side of the pump feeding into the second tank Don t worry if you add a small section to one end of the pipe when you double click as the pump or tank symbol will conceal it once we push them to the back layer When items are grouped double clicking on them will access the group configuration however objects inside of the group can have their own animation properties independently of the group s properties To access the individual objects within the group h
141. aphics page is open when changes are made to it using the replace feature you will need to manually save the page to persist the changes 59 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Role Name Admins I Windows Group Name Administrators 1 Global Privilege 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Comment Windows Administrator qroup Record 1 Record added Add the Windows Users group to have access to privilege level 1 across all areas of the project Role Name Operators I Windows Group Name Users Global Privilege 1 Comment Windows Restricted Llsers group I Record 1 Click the close button when you have finished Using Find and Replace We are going to perform rework on the variable tag Pump_1_CMD We are going to change its name to Pump_1_RUN to better represent its function Rather than searching the entire project for each place this tag is used we are going to use the project search and replace feature to perform this exchange for us Switch to the Citect Project Editor In the Project Editor III Menu click on Edit then click Cut al SEIRE el on Replace or use Ctrl R Copy Paste Cut Record Copy Record Paste Record Find Replace Find User Function Paste Function Paste Tag Using Find and Replace continued 60 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Type Pump_1_CMD in the Find box and Pump 1 RUN in
142. ates which will cause compilation failures Tutorial Citect Explorer balbas File View Tools Help Tutorial y al wal 111521 EE sz Project List Similarly make sure you only single click the Add button rather than double clicking otherwise duplicate records will be added causing complication failures Contents of Tags Ej My Projects 2 CSV Example e a ae Example Local Trend Tags SPC Tags For learners it is better to 1 43 Tutorial Variables use the Add button instead of Graphics the ENTER key If you add Tag an extra record by mistake 5 Ala you can use the Delete 3 System button to mark it for deletion Ej Communications Once marked for deletion the ES Cicode Files record will be ignored 03 CitectVBA Files If you press delete by mistake you can press it again to undelete To view records marked for deletion go to Tools select Options and check Show Deleted To permanently remove deleted records from the project go to File then select Pack Ready This will bring the Project Editor to the foreground and display the Variable Tags dialog If it does not appear use Alt Tab to switch the view to the Project Editor E Variable Tags Tutorial Variable Tag Name Cluster Name I O Device Name Address Data Type Raw Zero Scale Raw Full Scale Eng Zero Scale Eng Full Scale Eng Units X Format Deadband Comment Replace J Delete
143. atically saves your configuration to disk each time you add replace or delete a record Graphics behave differently where you must save your pages as you develop them TIP Engineering Units which are not included with CitectSCADA s default pull down list can be typed in manually Any text can be entered as engineering units 17 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Close the Variable Tags window by clicking on the or pressing ESC Creating Graphic Pages Before you start let s take a look at what you will create ceea Pages Trends Alarms Tools BEA G m 2 M O This page contains a number of buttons that allow the operator to control the pump s mode and operation as well as a slider to control its speed The pump itself will animate red or green depending on whether it is running or not and the lights bar graph and number will indicate its mode operation and speed 18 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphic Pages Creating a new page Switch to the Graphics Builder click on the Graphics Builder icon lt Click on the New Page al icon A popup form will appear allowing you to select what type of new graphics object you would like to create f Page Cancel Create a new graphics page Help using a pre defined template Template Create your own template to use as a base for similar graphics pages m Symbol db Create a new symbol for objects that you use often
144. ation counter is thus not applied causing a faster response when the load response is delayed from the commands Be sure that the position loop is completely adjusted and that the speed loop is operating safely before adjusting the feed forward amount Increasing the feed forward amount too much will cause the speed command to oscillate resulting in abnormal noise from the motor Increase the feed forward amount slowly from 0 adjusting it so that 3 26 Operation Chapter 3 the positioning completion output is not adversely affected e g turn repeatedly ON and OFF and so that the speed does not overshoot Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range 26 Position command 0 010640 Sets the time constant for smoothing posi acceleration decel tion command soft start function eration time Even if the position command pulses are constant input in steps the time constant set here will be used to accelerate decelerate the motor The same time will be used for both accel eration and deceleration Set this parameter to 0 when using a posi tion controller that has an acceleration de celeration function m Position Loop Adjustment e Position Loop Block Diagram Cn 1b Positioning Cn 02 bit Cn 26 Command 08 3 4 5 Position 2 25 1 04 05 17 pulses
145. ber Contacto L conduit yy 6 U gt 2 d A N 4 Suc Noise o o L2 V y filter A AR 2m a eo C LN d Le ji cha Mee he I 05m max Ground 100 max Controller Ferrite Ferrite POWER CN2 core yy Cl core A supply 48 f E A U _ 9 pe Clamp 0 CN2 7 Controller 1 Grounding plate 2E Controller Note 1 The cable winding for the ferrite core must be 1 5 turns Note 2 Remove the sheath from the cable and ground it directly to the metal plate at the clamps Ground the motor s frame to the machine ground when the motor is on a movable shaft Usethe grounding plate for the protective earth for each Unit as shown in the illustration and ground to a single point Use ground lines with a minimum thickness of 3 5 mm and arrange the wiring so thatthe ground lines are as short as possible If no fuse breakers MCCB are installed at the top and the power supply line is wired from the lower duct use metal tubes for wiring and make sure that there is adequate distance between the input lines and the internal wiring If input and output lines are wired together noise resistance will decrease No fuse breakers MCCB surge absorbers and noise filters NF should
146. c tioning Chapter 4 Countermeasures Correct any disconnected lines Insert connectors correct ly Replace the Servomotor Replace Servo Driver Correct any disconnected lines Insert connectors correct ly Replace the Servomotor Replace Servo Driver Reset and then run again Replace Servo Driver Reset and then run again Internal element is dam aged Replace Servo Driver Application Chapter 4 4 4 Periodic Maintenance A Caution After replacing a Unit always transfer all data required for operation before attempt ing to restart operation Improper data settings may damage the product N Caution Do not disassemble or repair the product Doing so may result in an electric shock and injury Servo Motors and Drives contain many components and will operate properly only when each of the individual components is operating properly Some of the electrical and me chanical components require maintenance depending on application conditions In or der to ensure proper long term operation of Servo Motors and Drivers periodic inspec tion and part replacement is required according to the life of the components The periodic maintenance cycle depends on the installation environment and application conditions of the Servo Motor or Driver Recommended maintenance times are listed below for Servo Motors and Drivers Use these are reference in determining actual maintenance sch
147. cable safety category is determined from the whole safety control system Make sure that the whole safety control System meets EN954 1 requirements Wire the 295 2001 G9S 2002 for auto reset If either one of them is connected to a manual reset switch EN954 1 requirements will not apply Safety Category 4 of EN954 1 Wire the G9S 2001 G9S 2002 for auto reset If either one of them is connected to a manual reset switch EN954 1 requirements will not apply Apply 2 channel external input to the T11 and T12 terminals and T21 and T22 terminals through switches each incorporating a force separation mechanism If limit switches are used make sure that at least one of them incorporates a force separation mechanism Refer to Application Examples and input a signal for the normally closed contact of the contactor i e input to X1 of the G9S 301 X2 of the G9S 501 or X2 of the G9S 321 T Be sure to ground the PE terminal If the relay is operating with DC the power supply may be grounded instead 15 G9S OMRON ors NOTE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25 4 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS INC OMRON CANADA INC One East Commerce Drive 885 Milner Avenue Schaumburg IL 60173 Scarborough Ontario M1B 5V8 1 800 55 OMRON 416 286 6465 Cat No CEDSAX3 10 99 Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in U S A om
148. card for RS 422A TSX SCP CD 1030 Connecting cable for PCMCIA for RS 232C TSX SCP CM 4030 Connecting cable for PCMCIA for RS 422A Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs Modicon TSX Micro 37 21 22 amp Premium Series PLCs For RS 422A connection TSX SCP114 TSX SCP CM 4030 Modicon TSX Quantum Series PLCs For RS 232C connection PLC Side Omron TSX SCP CX 4030 NT Side Orange White White Orange White Green Green White Brown White Terminal PLC Side Omron TSX SCP CX 4030 NT Side Orange White White Orange 15 SDA White Green 10 RDB Green White 16 RDA Brown White PA 25 Pin Male Metric Thread PLC Side Omron NT Side 0 9 Pin Male Metric Thread PLC Side Omron Shield RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS O hwnd 25 Pin Male NT631 Port B Terminal Strip NT31 Port B NT31 Port A NT631 Port or B NT31 Port B 19 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 USA 800 55 0MRON 66766 OMRON CANADA INC 885 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario M1B 5V8 416 286 6465 OMRON ON LINE Global http www omron com USA http www omron com oei Canada http www omron com oci UNITED STATES To locate a Regional Sales Office local Distributor or to obtain product information call 800 55 OMRON or 847 843 7900 Ontario
149. chine Not doing so may result in an injury A brake is not considered a safety stop Install an emergency stop to shut off power to the system instantly Not doing so may result in an injury Take sufficient measures to protect the product in the following locations Insufficient protection may damage the product Locations where static electricity and other noise is generated Locations subject to strong electromagnetic or magnetic fields Locations subject to radioactive exposure Locations close to power lines System Design Installation Chapter 2 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 External Dimensions Unit mm m AC Servo Drivers Non conforming Models e R88D UEPO4H UEPOSH 200 VAC 100 200 W R88D UEP10L 100 VAC 100 W Installation dimensions i a KX ia Three M4 T e R88D UEP12H 200 VAC 400 W and R88D UEP12L 100 VAC 200 W 5 Installation dimensions 130 6 2 5 60 1 XC m _ 2 3 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e R88D UEP20H 200 VAC 750 W and R88D UEP15L 100 VAC 300 W HN 35 Installation dimensions System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m AC Servo Drivers Conforming to EC Direct
150. command pulse mode o Jo Jo J Feedpulse PULS Direction signal SIGN 71024100220 Forward pulse CCW Reverse pulse CW Factory setting jo 90 differential phase A B phase signal 1x H da jo 90 differential phase A B phase signal 2x o j Aa 90 differential phase A B phase signal 4x Note One of three multiples can be selected when inputting a 90 differential phase signal 1x 2x or 4x If the 4x multiple is selected the input pulses are multiplied by a factor of 4 so the number of motor revolutions speed and angle are 4 times the number when the 1x multiple is selected 3 11 Operation Chapter 3 m Overtraveling Servomotor Deceleration to Stop Bit 08 of Cn 01 Select either one of the following methods of motor deceleration to stop at the time of overtraveling Deceleration method Stop condition Bit 8 Decelerate by dynamic brake Servo free dynamic brake OFF Overtravel occurs Decelerate by the maximum torque 7 4 lock While the is servo OFF condition the following motor deceleration method is used when an alarm goes Deceleration method Stop condition Servo OFF or Alarm Decelerate by dynamic brake Servo free dynamic brake ON 3 5 Setting Functions User Parameters Execute the user parameter settings in order as foll
151. conform to EC Directives 2 28 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 3 Wiring Products Conforming to EC Directives 2 3 1 Connecting Servo Controllers Use general purpose control cables purchased separately to connect U series UE Model AC Servomotors and Servo Drivers to OMRON Servo Controllers m Connecting to a Servo Controller Servo Controller General purpose Control Cable R88A CPU S lt W OMNUC U series UE Model AC Servo Driver Model conforming to EC Di A rectives J Ex Power Cable R88A CAUOO 1 OMNUC U series R88A CAUO1B UE Model AC Servomotor Model conforming to EC Directives Encoder Cable R88A CRUD Note Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications for connector and cable specifications 2 29 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 3 2 Wiring Servo Drivers Provide proper wire diameters ground systems and noise resistance when wiring terminal blocks m Wiring Terminal Blocks E 2222 2 a 2 lt lt 2 S S O 2222 To Motor Power Cable R88A CAU001 R88A CAU01B with brake The broken lines indicate signal lines for the brake There is no polarity on these lines L1 Power supply The commercial power supply input terminals for the main circuit and the input control circui
152. copy items to your local project before modifying 19 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphic Pages Saving your page We are using the built in templates to get a jump start on your page There are navigation buttons already configured for you and using templates helps to ensure a consistent look and feel throughout your project This is very important if you want to make it easy to use for your operators lt casa older Tutorial Templates are displayed pretty much as they appear at runtime o Bercy indicates dynamic values that will change at runtime 1 2 etc are Animation Numbers that are used as references for graphics objects that will be displayed at these locations in runtime Animation Numbers are not displayed at runtime F x is a script that is executed with the page It is good practice to save your graphics pages regularly so let s begin the habit right now Click on the Save icon on the menu bar MyPage the edit then press You move the Toolbox by placing the cursor on the title bar hold down the left mouse key while moving the mouse If your toolbox does not appear it can be toggled by pressing the button or selecting it from the View menu Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics pages setting up the Grid gt Firstly we will setup a grid w
153. d XW2B omnon XW2B opecifications POSITION CONTROL TERMINAL BLOCKS te rr fenciosurerating Operating 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F CONNECTORS Rated current 1A Rated voltage 24 VDC Contact resistance 20 mQ max with 100 mA max at 20 mV max See note 1 Insulation resistance 5 MQ min at 500 VDC Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 minute with a current leakage of 1 mA max See note 2 Enclosure rating IP00 Electrical protection Class 0 Ambient temperature Operating 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Note 1 The resistance indicated is the contact resistance of the connector 2 The voltage indicated is the dielectric strength of the connector omnon XW2B XW2B Dimensions Unit mm inch POSITION CONTROL TERMINAL BLOCKS side Servo side XW2B 20J6 1B 135 5 31 3 5 Two 3 5 dia holes Terminal block 20 P with rotary cover Connection to Terminal Block The terminal signal name varies with the servo driver Refer to the Operation Manual of the servo driver in use A Em Note The terminal block has a terminal pitch of 7 62 mm Identify the servo driver in use by writing the name 205 58 on the terminal nameplates provided Affix the 4 nameplate to the terminal cover Connection to One Axis Position Control Modules C200H NC112 U C200HW NC113 U
154. d deviation counter reset input lines Do not connect the ground wires for these two power supplies to the same ground We recommend line drivers for the pulse command and deviation counter reset outputs For the pulse command and deviation counter reset input lines be sure to use twisted pair shielded cable and connect both ends of the shield wire to ground If the control power supply wiring is long noise resistance be improved by adding 1 uF laminated ceramic capacitors between the control power supply and ground at the Servo Driver input section and the controller output section For encoder output Z phase lines be sure to use twisted pair shielded cable and connect both ends of the shield wire to ground Wiring must be 1 m or less when using open collector outputs 2 26 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 2 5 Peripheral Device Connection Examples m Connecting to Peripheral Devices R T Single phase 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLI H Q Single phase 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEP L ON 777 MCCB 1 2 Noise filter E NE Main circuit 2 4 power su
155. d no fuse breakers are generally suitable Refer to the table in 2 2 3 Terminal Block Wiring for the power supply input currents for each motor and then add the current consumption for the number of shafts other controllers etc to make the selection The Servo Driver inrush current flows at a maximum of 50 A for 20 ms when 200 V is input With low speed no fuse breakers a inrush current 7 to 8 times the rated current flows for 0 1 second When mak ing the selection take into consideration the entire inrush current for the system e Surge Absorbers Use surge absorbers to absorb surges from power supply input lines due to lightning abnormal volt ages etc When selecting surge absorbers take into account the varistor voltage the amount of surge immunity and the amount of energy resistance For 200 VAC systems use a varistor voltage of 470 V The surge absorbers shown in the following table are recommended 2 34 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Max limit Surge Type voltage immunity Okaya RA V 781BYZ 2 1 000 A For power supply line Electric Ind RAV 781BXZ 4 783 V 1 000 A For power supply line ground Note 1 Refer to manufacturers documentation for operating details Note 2 Thesurge immunity is for a standard impulse current of 8 20 us If pulses are wide either decrease the current or change to a larger capacity surge absorber e Noise Filters Use the following noise filters on the power supplies for the
156. d symbol Symbol left red Library left green left grey niimne end larne eft vello rey right green i Help Click on the Set button next to the On Symbol edit box to change the On symbol from a red light to a green pump Using the same technique as above locate the left_green pump then Double Click on it Use the Insert button to insert the tag Pump_1_CMD Click OK 48 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps Piping continued symbol Set Properti v Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input gt Slider Access Type 1 ON symbol when Onj off Pump 1 C Muli state C Array Animated OFF symbol ON symbol Set Set left_red left_green Clear Property Cancel Apply Help Configuration of the pump s animation is now complete We now need to add source and destination receptacles along with accompanying pipework and the page will be complete Click on the Static Symbol Tool in the ToolBox Using the scroll bars locate the tanks cylindrical symbol library and then Double Click tank wide large Click and drag the tank to position it on the left hand side of the page Symbol tank wide large Library tanks con pipe tank large tank tall tanks cyl conb 45 tanks cyl contb 30 tanks cyl tanks conical tank tall large tanks cyl conb 30 Fanke drum i H
157. d to be set Note 2 The Down Key can be pressed when all digits higher than the blinking one are zeros to set the minimum value in the setting range Note 3 The fifth digit i e the leftmost digit cannot be made to blink by pressing the Left Key The fifth digit can be set from the fourth digit For example to set 10000 press the Left Key to make the fourth digit blink and then press the Up Key again once the fourth digit reaches 9 The fifth digit will change to 1 and the fourth digit will change to 0 e Making Settings with Mounted type R88A PRO3U 1 Using the Up and Down Keys set the data If the keys are held down the numbers will change 10 at atime If the keys are held down even longer the numbers will change 100 and then 1 000 ata time 2 Press the MODE SET Key or the DATA Key The parameter will be set and the display will blink 3 Pressing the DATA Key again will bring back the parameter number display 4 Repeat steps 1 through 4 above as required to set other parameters 3 13 Operation Chapter 3 3 5 2 User Parameter Chart Parameter name Factory Unit Setting Explanation setting range Cn 00 System check mode Refer to system check mode explanation Cn 01 Setup parameter no 1 Refer to setup parameter no 1 explanation Cn 02 Setup parameter no 2 Refer to setup parameter no 2 explanation Cn 04 Speed loop gain Hz 1 to 2 000 Adjusts speed loop response See note 1 Cn 05 Speed loo
158. data values are retained on shutdown as they reside on the I O Server s hard drive Local Tags are serviced by each individual Citect node So each client is looking only at its own data Local Tag values are not retained when the Citect node is shutdown On the fourth step click Disk I O Device then click Next This configures the system to use a hard drive based device instead of a real world device Disk I O devices are useful for simulation and testing situations as well as for persisting recipe or other information at the SCADA level instead of in the PLC 12 Express Communications Wizard Select the type of the I O Device ing C External I O Device I O Device name IODev Back Cancel Help On the fifth step scroll to the top of the protocol list and select Citect Generic Protocol by clicking on it then click Next Express Communications Wizard E Drivers a ABB ABB Kent Taylor Advantech Em the i Allen Bradley mouse Amel communication for Bernecker and Rainer the I O Device Campbell Scientific m Selected driver Manufacturer Citect Generic Protocol Model Citect Generic Protocol Communications Citect Generic Protocol Cancel Help 13 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring I O Device continued On the final two screens you just need to press the Next amp Finish buttons Express Communications Wizard Select this option if you
159. ds or slower except for their key operating parameters There are many more trend features available in Citect Press F2 with this form open to see some of the advanced possibilities Pressing F2 again will return you to the basic menus Click on the icon to close the Trend Tags dialog Configuring Security Most projects require secure user authentication before they will allow control activities to be executed from the HMI In Citect this can be achieved via local users or Windows users In addition to any security that we might configure on our own objects we also need to define security login credentials to access all of the functionality available from the built in pages supplied with Citect Switch to the Citect Project Editor On the Project Editor Menu click on System then click on Users File Edit Tags Alarms System Communication Servers Tools Window Help E3 dE Keyboard Commands 8 Keyboard Keys Reports Events Accumulators Devices Users Roles Groups Labels Fonts Parameters Included Projects Fill in the User form as below then click Add Configuring Security continued Local users are managed from within the Citect configuration environment Windows users refer Roles below are managed from either the Windows operating system or a networked domain server options allocations Press F2 to view the additional parameters availab
160. ds y TagFilter Cluster Filter Search J Search results Cluster Ta Comment Engineering Units Sample Period Tren Add pens to MyCluster Pump_1_Speed Pump 1 Speed 0 500000 New pane Pen Type Analog Pen name Comment Y 4 77 Add 1 1of1 Selected Items Tag Comment Pen Type Pen Name Pane Pump_1_Speed Pump 1 Speed Analog Pump 1 Speed Panel Remove Show Detail 4 m C Cancel Help Click on Search to find all configured trend pens Select the Pump 1 Speed pen and click Add Add New Pen s Now change the Type from Trends to Alarms Repeat your search and select Define search Pump 1 Mode from the alarm list Click Add then when you are finished click OK Type Trends Y Alarms Search Trends P A new display pane will be added to the page displaying both the Pump_1_Speed analogue pen as well as the Pump 1 Mode digital alarm pen If the gridlines do not appear click on the graph area and it will refresh the display Experiment with some of the control buttons described on the next page or click and drag on the graph itself to move through history The Process Analyst can have many display panes Each pane supports both digital and analogue pens To create multiple panes you will need to customize the toolbar so that the Add Panes button is available to you see the Online Help Alternatively you can create a new pane each time you are selecting new pens for display Quickstart T
161. e 1 4 1 5 1 4 Directives and Applicable Models 1 6 Chapter 2 System Design and Installation 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 nia e 2 3 2 1 1 External Dimensions Unit mm 2 3 2 1 2 Installation Conditions 1 2 15 Wiring Non conforming Products 2 18 2 2 1 Connecting OMRON Servo Controllers 2 18 2 2 2 Connector Terminal Conversion Unit 2 19 2 2 3 Wiring Servo Drivers 2 2 20 2 2 4 Wiring for Noise Resistance 2 22 2 2 5 Peripheral Device Connection Examples 2 27 Wiring Products Conforming to EC 2 29 2 3 1 Connecting Servo Controllers 1 2 29 2 3 2 Witing Servo Drivets a ri eee ad 2 30 2 3 3 Wiring Products Conforming to EMC Directives 2 31 2 3 4 Peripheral Device Connection Examples 2 38 Chapt
162. e Restore Project Restore from Backup file C Users Public Documents Tutorial ctz Browse To Current project Name TutorialTest New project Location E CitectSCADA 7 10 User TutorialTest Browse Options Configuration files Select sub directories to All sub directories sub directories Selected sub directories Cancel Help Click on the Browse button to locate your backup file We will restore to a new project test it and then delete it as this is a much better test than restoring over the existing project and less chance of anything going wrong eg what if the power fails half way through restoring over the top of your existing project or your backup has a fault in it Make sure New Project is checked In the Name edit box type a name for the new project e g TutorialTest then click OK When the restore is completed click OK on the Restore Complete Dialog click on the TutorialTest project to switch to that project then change to the Citect Project Editor to compile the project before clicking on the Computer Setup Wizard and repeating the Setup steps identified earlier in this tutorial to configure the computer to run the Tutorial Test project in stand alone mode Make sure you have shutdown the Tutorial project prior to attempting to run the TutorialTest project Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Restoring Your Project continued
163. e 2 Encoder Cable CN1 CE D wn 3 CN1 BKIR 7 gt R88A CPU s gt 24 VDC General purpose OGND 10 Control Cable 2 38 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 Operational Procedure 3 2 Turning On Power and Checking Displays 3 3 Using Parameter Units 3 4 Initial Settings Setup Parameters 3 5 Setting Functions User Parameters 3 6 Trial Operation 3 7 Making Adjustments 3 8 Regenerative Energy Absorption Operation Chapter 3 Operation and Adjustment Precautions N Caution Confirm the settings of all parameters to be sure they are correct before starting ac tual operation Incorrect parameters may damage the product N Caution Do not make extreme changes in the settings of the product Doing so may result in unstable operation of the product and injury N Caution Confirm the operation of the motor before connecting it to the mechanical system Unexpected motor operation may result in injury N Caution If an alarm is ON remedy the cause make sure the system is safe reset the alarm and restart the system Not doing so may result in an injury N Caution The system may restart abruptly when power is resupplied after an instantaneous power failure Take safety measures to prevent accidents that may resultin an injury A Caution Do not use the built in brake of the Servomotor for normal control of the Servomotor Doing so may result in a Servomo
164. e EJES Contents of Tutorial P o o B Graphics Tags Alarms System Communic CicodeFiles CitectvBA Files C G E My Projects CSV Example 4 Example Graphics 03 Tags Alarms 3 System Communications Cicode Files 1 CitectVBA Files m Ready Use the Browse button to locate a directory where you want to save your files to Alternately you can type the directory and filename into the Backup File edit box If the directory does not exist CitectSCADA will automatically create it for you when it saves the file Click OK and when the Backup Complete message pops up click OK on that also r Project Name Tutorial 52 Backup to Backup file C Users Public Documents Tutorial ctz Browse Options Use compression use encryption Save compiled V Save configuration files V Save sub directories Cancel Help 76 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Restoring Your Project With any software it is good practice to check and make sure you can restore from your backup copies It is very rare to experience problems restoring from a CitectSCADA backup but the time taken to check is a tiny fraction compared to the time it would take to recreate the project from scratch Click on the Restore icon it is next to the backup icon on the menu bar click Tools then Restor
165. e brake interlock output BKIR will turn OFF when the motor speed is reduced to 100 r min or less The brake interlock output BKIR will also turn OFF if power is not supplied to the motor for 500 ms even if the motor speed is greater than 100 r min This setting is used to prevent destroying the holding brake on the servomotor or the machine e Torque Command Filter Time Constant Cn 17 This sets the low pass filter time constant for the torque command The setting range is 0 to 250 x 100 us and the factory setting is 4 x 100 us The relationship between the filter time constant and the cut off frequency can be found by means of the following formula fc Hz 1 2 T Filter time constant If T 400 us fc will be approximately 400 Hz When the characteristic vibration of the machinery is within the response frequency of the servo loop Servomotor vibration will occur In order to prevent this sympathetic vibration based on the characteris tic vibration of the machinery setthe torque filter time constantto a value that will eliminate the vibration i e set it to a high value e Position Loop Gain Cn 1A Adjust the position loop gain to the rigidity of the machine Set to between 50 and 70 1 s for general NC machine tools to between 30 and 50 1 s for general and assembly machines and to 10 to 30 1 s for industrial robots Load alarms will be caused by machine oscillation if the position loop gain is increased
166. e breakers high frequency current is not detected preventing the breaker from operating due to leakage current When selecting leakage breakers also remember to add the leakage current from devices other than the Servomotor such as machines using a switching power supply noise filters inverters and so on For detailed information about the selection methods of leakage breakers refer to catalogs provided by manufacturers The following table shows the Servomotor leakage currents for each Servo Driver Driver Leakage current direct Leakage current resistor capacitor including high frequency current in commercial power supply fre quency range R88D UEPO4V to 3 mA UEPO8V R88D UEP12V 60 mA 4mA R88D UEP20V 110 mA 5 mA 2 36 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Note 1 Leakage current values shown above are for motor power lines of 10 m or less The values will change depending on the length of power cables and the insulation Note 2 Leakage current values shown above are for normal temperatures and humidity The values will change depending on the temperature and humidity Note 3 Leakage current for 100 VAC input Servomotors is approximately half that of the values shown above m Improving Encoder Cable Noise Resistance The following encoder signals are used A B and S phase The frequency for A or B phase signals is 154 kHz max the transmission speed for S phase signals is 616 kbps Follow the
167. e of a motor with a brake can be operated reliably m Computer Monitor Software The special Servo Driver Communications Software allows parameter setting speed and current monitoring I O monitoring auto tuning and jog operations to be performed from a personal com puter It is also possible to perform multiple axis communications that set the parameters and moni tor the operation of several drivers Refer to the Computer Monitor Software Instruction Manual 1513 for OMNUC U series Servo Drivers for more details Note Version 1 1 or later of the Computer Monitor Software supports the UE Models 1 3 Introduction Chapter 1 1 2 System Configuration SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Programmable Controller C200H NC112 C200H NC211 Position Control Unit Parameter Units SYSMAC Programmable Controller cm sevsege z i Hi EY 1181 4 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 Position Control Unit mmm OMNUC U series UE Models AC Servo Driver OMNUC U series AC Servomotor 1 4 Introduction Chapter 1 1 3 Servo Driver Nomenclature m Front View CN4 Not used Power supply indicator OMRON R88D UEP04H Gi AC SERVO DRIVER Q 200V 100W Alarm indicator a CNS Parameter Unit connector T CN1 Control I O connector CN2 Encoder connector Terminal block it F lt 2 vo
168. e synchronized When using a positioner with a low command pulse frequency To set the machine movement per pulse to a specific value such as 0 01 mm m Setting User Parameters electronic gear is set as G1 divided by G2 G1 G2 G1 is set in user parameter Cn 24 G2 is set in Cn 25 The target pulse count is computed as follows 3 14 Operation Chapter 3 Target pulse count Command pulse count x G1 G2 e If G1 G2 1 the motor will turn once for every 4 096 command pulses driver running at a factor of 4X One pulse forthe position deviation deviation counter display and positioning completion range will be equivalent to one input pulse here the unit is said to be the command Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation SEU range Electronic gear ratio G1 1 to 65 535 Setting range numerator 1 100 lt G1 G2 lt 100 Electronic gear ratio G2 1 1 to 65 535 denominator Note The factory settings will produce turn the motor once for every 1 024 input pulses m Example If G1 is setto 4 096 and G2is setto 1 000 the motor will turn once for every 1 000 input pulses output as 4 096 pulses The motor speed will also be 4 096 1 000 times faster Driver Motor One revolution 1 000 pulses Electronic gear 4 096 pulses 4 096 pulses _ _ 1 4 096 1 000 3 5 4 Brake Interlock For Motors with Brakes m Magnetic Brakes The magnetic brakes for
169. e values at an armature winding tempera ture of 100 C combined with the Servo Driver Other values are at normal conditions 20 C 65 The maximum momentary torque is a reference value e AC Servomotor Heat Radiation Conditions When an AC Servomotor is continuously operated at the rated conditions a heat radiation plate equiva lent to an rectangular aluminum plate of t6 x 250 mm is required at the Servomotor flange mounting area This is for horizontal mounting with nothing around the Servomotor and no interference from heat convection currents 5 22 Specifications Chapter 5 m 100 VAC Servomotors NENNEN i Rated output see note Rated torque see note kgfecm Rated rotational speed R88M UE10030L S1 UE10030W S1 100 0 318 3 25 R88M UE20030L S1 UE30030L S1 UE20030W S1 UE30030W S1 T 0657 649 R88M 3 000 Momentary maximum rotational 4 500 speed Momentary maximum torque see Nem note 3 000 4 500 KI 195 kgfecm Momentary maximum rated cur rent ratio Rated current see note Momentary maximum current see note Rotor inertia 3 7 126 10 0256 260 5 5 rm rm gt kgem GD2 4 0 40 x 10 5 kgfecmes 0 41 x 10 4 Torque constant see note Nem A 0 156 kgfecm A 1 59 Induced voltage constant see mV r min 5 43 note Power rate see note 25 4 1 23x 1075 ms mH Electrical time constant
170. ected mechanical system and au tomatically adjusts the position loop gain the speed loop gain and the speed loop in tegration time constant When adjustments cannot be made by auto tuning refer to 3 7 2 Manually Adjusting Gain m Executing Auto tuning 1 2 3 6 hj J Indicates settings mode System check mode Data g y 4 Co 5 CO C DILE L U Auto tuning display Auto tuning end display 1 Confirm that the initial display is shown bb 2 Press the MODE SET Key to enter the settings mode 3 Using the Up and Down Keys set parameter number 00 System check mode 4 Press the DATA Key to display the setting of Cn 00 5 Using the Up and Down Keys set the parameter to 05 Auto tuning 6 Press the MODE SE T Key to switch to the mechanical rigidity selection display 7 Using the Up and Down Keys adjust the rigidity to the mechanical system Refer to Selecting Me chanical Rigidity below 8 Press the MODE SET Key to switch to the auto tuning display 9 Press the SERVO DATA Key to turn on the servo This step is not required if the Run Command Input is ON 10 Perform auto tuning using the Up Key for forward operation and the Down Key for reverse opera tion Continue pressing the key until End is display
171. ector outputs 30 VDC 50 mA External regeneration processing Required for regeneration of more than 30 times the Required for regeneration motor s rotor inertia of more than 20 times the motor s rotor inertia Protective functions Overcurrent grounding overload overvoltage overspeeding runaway protection transmission errors encoder errors deviation counter overflow Note The input pulse width must be meet the following conditions H Ti Tin gt 2 5 us TiL 5 6 Specifications Chapter 5 5 1 3 I O Specifications m Terminal Block Specifications Non conforming Models Power supply in put Main circuit DC output Servomotor U phase output R88D UEPLILIH 200 VAC Units Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLILIL 100 VAC Units Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 VAC 50 60 Hz These are the connection terminals for the Regeneration Unit R88A RGO8UA Connect these when the regeneration energy is high These are the terminals for outputs to the Servomotor Servomotor V phase output Servomotor W phase output Frame ground Power supply in put Green This is the connection terminal Use a 100 Q or less class 3 or bet ter ground It is used in common for Servomotor output and power supply input R88D UEPLILIV 200 VAC Units Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLILIW 100 V
172. ed indicating that auto tuning has been com pleted 3 21 Operation Chapter 3 11 Release the key The data display will return 12 Press the DATA Key to return to the settings mode m Selecting Mechanical Rigidity Select the set value to match the rigidity of the mechanical system Response Set Position loop gain Representative applications value 1 s oot 16 Articulated robots harmonic drives chain drives belt drives rack and pinion drives etc Medium 003 40 XY tables Cartesian coordinate robots general purpose ma chinery etc High 56 Ball screws direct coupling feeders etc o m Auto tuning Auto tuning will not be complete until at least three operations have been completed Be sure there is plenty of room for the machine to operate If the auto tuning is not complete after three operation operations will be repeat as long as the key is held down The motor speed for auto tuning is approximately 250 r min The auto tuning speed cannot be chan ged Auto tuning will automatically change the setting of the user parameter position loop gain 1 speed loop gain Cn 04 and speed loop integration time constant Cn 05 These values will not be changed however until the auto tuning operation has been completed If auto tuning does not complete or if the gain set via auto tuning is not sufficient adjust the gain manu ally using the procedure in 3 7 2 Manually Ad
173. edules Servo Motors Recommended Periodic Maintenance Oil Seal 2 000 hours Bearings 20 000 hours Application Conditions Ambient motor operating temperature of 40 within allowable shaft load rated operation rated torque and r m installed as described in operation manual The radial loads during operation rotation on timing pulleys and other components contacting belts is twice the still load Consult with the belt and pulley manufacturers and adjust designs and system set tings so thatthe allowable shaft load is not exceeded even during operation If a motor is used under a shaft load exceeding the allowable limit the motor shaft can break the bearings can burn out and other problems can occur m Servo Driver and Regeneration Units Recommended Periodic Maintenance Aluminum analytical capacitors 50 000 hours Application Conditions Ambient driver regeneration unit operating temperature of 50 rated op eration rated torque installed as described in operation manual The life of aluminum analytical capacitors is greatly affected by the ambient operating temperature Generally speaking an increase of 10 C in the ambient operating temperature will reduce capacitor life by 5096 We recommend that ambient operating temperature be lowered and the power supply time be reduced as much as possible to lengthen the maintenance times for Servo Drivers and Regen eration Units It is recommended that the Servo D
174. elp Repeat for a second tank this time using the tanks_cyl_conb_30 library with the tank_large symbol positioned on the right side of the page above the pump 49 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps amp Piping continued Click on the Pipe Tool in the ToolBox The Pipe tool generates 3D rendered polylines with node points that identify bends or junctions Pipes can be color filled the same as any other drawing object in CitectSCADA and will render the flooded color in 3D We will now draw two separate pipes one from the source tank on the left side of the page and one to the destination tank on the right side of the page To draw the right hand pipe 1 With the pipe tool selected Hold down the Ctrl Key Forces only horizontal and vertical lines to be drawn 2 Place cursor on top of the right hand tank in the approximate center click and hold down the left mouse button and move mouse downwards Release mouse key when you have moved far enough to draw the first leg of the pipe 3 Move mouse to the left release the Ctrl Key to allow diagonal pipes if you wish and click again to create the second leg in the pipe 4 Continue until you are satisfied with your pipe s route and Double Click to end the pipe at the pump Note that you can return and adjust the individual junctions of the pipe to fine tune its position and shape later Release the Ctrl Key when you are finished the pipe
175. emove the ikal New Page r New Button H Menu Tre New Item ken New Subltem Ken de Delete Page Delete Button hen Delete em PA Delete Subltem Alat TE Copy Page Save tem Disabled Alarms hem Hardware Alarms Aem Configure Alarm Groups H Mena Tools em Admin Tools Jem Tag Debug Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 72 Configuration l 3 Edit New Page New Button New Item gt New Subltem Delete Page B Men Delete Button Delete Item Delete Subltern Copy Page Save kem Configure Alarm Groups E Mem Tools Jem Admin Tools Aem Tag Debug Edit Item New Page New Button i Right Click to ed Delete Page Delete Button Delete Delete Subltern Copy Page Save New Item New Subltem Edit Menu Item Administrative Tools Configuring the Menu continued Right click anywhere in the left hand pane and select New Button from the available options Right click on this new Button and select New Item from the available options Right click on this new Item and select Edit Item from the available options Type MyPage as the Action and select True from the pull down list for the Checked option Click OK Actions must refer either to the name of a page to display or a Cicode function If specifying a Cicode function it must be prefixed by a question mark 2 Menu Configuration allows the following t
176. er For lit setthe bit number to 1 For not lit set it to 0 3 9 Operation Chapter 3 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above as required 4 Save the data in memory by pressing the DATA Key 5 With this the parameter setting operation is complete Pressing the DATA Key atthis point will bring back the parameter number display 3 4 2 Setup Parameter Contents Cn 01 and Cn 02 m Setup Parameter No 1 Cn 01 Factory Setting Explanation setting Sequence input sig Servo turned ON or OFF by Run command externally input nal switching Servo always ON Not used Enables forward drive prohibit input POT Permits always forward drive Enables reverse drive prohibit input Permits always reverse drive Not used Not used Not used Not used The dynamic brake decelerates to stop the Servomotor at the time of overtraveling The maximum torque decelerates to stop the Servomotor at the time of overtraveling Not used Deviation counter Clear counter for alarms occurring while Servo is OFF with Servo OFF Do not clear counter for alarms occurring while Servo is OFF Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Note 1 Do not the settings of bits 1 4 through 7 9 or b through F of setup parameter 1 Cn 01 Note 2 These parameters become effective only after power is reset Confirm that the indicators go out before turning power back on Check to see that the LED display has gone off
177. er alone is shown in the diagrams below If a Servo Driver is operated outside of this range a Regeneration Unit must be connected These diagrams show the applicable range for the horizontal shaft If an exter nal force acts the same direction as the Servomotor rotation due to factors such as the fall time on the vertical shaft be sure to measure the regenerative energy and check to see that the amount that can be absorbed is not exceeded e R88D UEPO4H UEPO4V 100 W R88D UEP10L UEP10W 100 W Applicable load inertia x10 4kgem 100W 1 2 x 10 4kgem2 1000 2000 3000 4500 Rotational speed r min 3 31 Operation Chapter 3 e R88D UEP08H UEP08V 200 W R88D UEP12L UEP12W 200 W Applicable load inertia x10 4kgem 9 0 401 200W 3 69 x 10 4kgem 1000 2000 3000 4500 Rotational speed r min e R88D UEP12H UEP12V 400 W R88D UEP15L UEP15W 300 W Applicable load inertia x107 kgem 5 0 4 01 300 400W 3 8 x 10 4kg m In ue GITA UEP15L 3 0 UEP15W UEP12H 1 9 2 0 UEP12V 1 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4500 Rotational speed r min 3 32 Operation Chapter 3 e R88D UEP20H UEP20V 750 W Applicable load inertia x1074kgem 700W 13 4 x 10 k 1000 2000 3000 4500 Rotational speed r min 3 8 3 Absorption of Regenerative Energy with the External Regeneration Resistor Connect one or more external regeneration resistors when a Regeneration Unit R88A RGO8UA cannot
178. er order from GE V060 E1 2 Operation Manual Multi vendor Connection Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Series PLCs Communicates with Siemens HMI Adapter protocol The Omron NT is communicating RS 232 to the Siemens HMI adapter 6E57 972 0CA10 OXAO The adapter is necessary to convert the HMI Adapter protocol into the Siemens proprietary MPI protocol Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Series NT631C CN323 EU i NT31 Port A 6 57 972 0 10 631 Port or NT31C CN323 EU Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Communication Cables and Accessories NT31 Port B NT31C CN323 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 9 pin NT to Siemens PLC NT631C CN323 EU 3 0 m cable 9 to 9 pin NT to Siemens PLC 6E57 972 0CA10 OXAO HMI Adapter for MPI protocol order from Siemens V060 E1 2 Operation Manual Multi vendor Connection Mitsubishi A Series PLCs Communicates using Mitsubishi s Computer Link protocol The Omron NT and the Mitsubishi A Series PLC are communicating using RS 232 communications Communications be RS 422 by using custom cables as specified in Operation Manual VO42 E1 1 T A Series NT631C CN324 EU NT31 Port A NT631 Port or Computer Link Module NT31C CN324 EU Mitsubishi A Series Communication Cables and Accessories NT31 Port B NT31C CN324 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 9 to Mits A
179. er 3 Operation 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 5 3 6 3 8 Operational Procedure us aqa A TR Uus as u e ER Ue 3 3 3 1 1 Beginning Operation 2 3 3 Turning On Power and Checking Displays 3 4 3 2 1 Items to Check Before Turning On Power 3 4 3 2 2 Turning On Power and Confirming the Display 3 4 Using Parameter Units 3 6 3 3 1 Parameter Unit Keys and Functions 3 6 3 3 2 Modes and Changing Modes 3 6 3 3 3 Mode Changes and Display 3 8 Initial Settings Setup Parameters 3 9 3 4 1 Setting and Checking Setup Parameters Cn 01 02 3 9 3 4 2 Setup Parameter Contents Cn 01 and 02 3 10 3 4 3 Important Setup Parameters Cn 01 and Cn 02 3 11 Setting Functions User Parameters 1 3 12 3 5 1 Setting and Checking User Parameters Cn 04 to 26 3 12 3 5 2 User Parameter Chart estoit epu ke pep RU a qaa ER Sa Y REUS 3 14 3 523 Blectronic Gear d sre e eeu er e rese ng ee Peer eq etes
180. erated in environments in which there is minimal temperature rise to maintain a high level of reliability Temperature rise in any Unit installed in a closed space such as a control box will cause the ambient temperature to rise inside the entire closed space Use a fan or a air conditioner to preventthe ambi ent temperature of the Servo Driver from exceeding 50 Unit surface temperatures may rise to as much as 30 above the ambient temperature Use heat resistant materials for wiring and keep separate any devices or wiring that are sensitive to heat The service life of a Servo Driver is largely determined by the temperature around the internal elec trolytic capacitors The service life of an electrolytic capacitor is affected by a drop in electrolytic vol ume and an increase in internal resistance which can result in overvoltage alarms malfunctioning due to noise and damage to individual elements If a Servo Driver is always operated at the maxi mum ambient temperature of 50 C then a service life of approximately 50 000 hours can be ex pected A drop of 10 in the ambient temperature will double the expected service life 2 15 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e Keeping Foreign Objects Out of Units Place a cover over the Units or take other preventative measures to prevent foreign objects such as drill filings from getting into the Units during installation Be sure to remove the cover after installa ti
181. erse drive prohibit overtravel When they are in put driving is possible in the respective directions When driving is prohibited movement will stop ac cording to the setting of bit no 8 of setup parameter no 1 Cn 01 Alarm status will not be generated at the Driver When drive prohibition is not used clear the function by connecting the respective signal to the external power supply 24 V GND or setting setup parameter Cn 01 bit nos 2 3 1 1 Stopping Methods when Forward Reverse Drive Prohibit is OFF M Deceleration Method Stopped Status 0 8 o Decelerate by dynamic brake Servo free dynamic brake OFF POT NOT is OFF Decelerate by the maximum Servo lock Note The position loop is not valid when stopping with this mode e Alarm Reset 18 RESET This is the external reset signal input for the servo alarm The alarm is reset when the signal turns ON Remove the cause of the alarm and then restart operation In order to prevent danger turn OFF the run command before inputting the reset signal e Command Pulse Inputs and Deviation Counter Reset Inputs The input circuits for command pulse and deviation counter reset inputs are shown in the following dia gram Line driver Input Controller side Servo Driver side 5 2200 v b Too 21 _ ers Applicable line driver AM26LS31A or equivalent 5 1 Specifications Chapter 5
182. et too short vibration will occur When the speed loop integration time constant is manipulated the response is as shown in the diagram below When speed loop integral time constant is short Motor speed speed monitor X When speed loop integral time constant is long Time Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range Cn 17 Torque command 010250 Sets torque command filter time constant filter time constant Increase the time constant to reduce os cillation and vibration due to machinery res onance frequency The filter characteristic is switched using the torque command filter time constants 1 Position loop gain 110500 For servo lock strength adjustment when position lock function is used Adjust to match mechanical rigidity 3 25 Operation Chapter 3 e Position Loop Gain Adjust the position loop gain according to the rigidity of the machine The responsiveness of the servo system is determined by the position loop gain When a servo system has high position loop gain the responsiveness is greater and positioning can be faster In order for position loop gain to be raised the mechanical rigidity and the characteristic frequency must be in creased For general NC machine tools the range is 50 to 70 1 s for general machinery and assembly devices it is 30 to 50 1 s for industrial robots it is 10 to 30 1 s The factory setting for position
183. eted e Encoder Z phase Output 32 and 33 Z and ZCOM The encoder Z phase signal is output from the Servomotor The output i e 20 mA open collector out put at 30 VDO is OFF when the Z phase is detected 5 15 Specifications Chapter 5 m Control I O Signal Connections and External Signal Processing Reverse pulse ROREM Forward pulse Sens EPA EMILE i Positioning completion erating voltage 9 gom 30 VDC cS COMO Maximum out Deviation counter reset ECRST 5 20222 SRU ground put current 50 Do not connect Alarm output these pins ALMCOM Maximum op Ho m erating voltage TERN 30 VDC i ata Paasa Maximum out i 7 put current 20 mA 12 to 24 VDC Run Gain decel eration O Forward rotation drive prohibit Reverse rotation drive prohibit Frame ground see note Note Pin 36 is not used on models conforming to EC Directives 5 16 Specifications Chapter 5 m CN2 Encoder Input Specifications Pin Wo Signal name Function met 7 1 2 3 Power supply outlet for encoder 5 V 350 mA DE Nous in 12 15 S Encoder S phase input Line driver input conforming to ElA RS422A 415 5 Encoder S phase input Input impedance 220 E A Encoder A phase input Line driver input conforming to ElA RS422A Encoder A
184. ew Tools Help Project List Projects a 29 CSV Example Example I O Servers Alarm Trend Servers Report Network Boards 2 5 Tutorial Servers Servers Addresses 23 Graphics gt O Tags x Alarms Ports Modems 1 0 Devices yo 03 System Remapping 428 Communicatiogs ta Cicode Files ES CitectVBA Files m Ready On the Express Communications Wizard just press the Next button for the first three steps making sure your MylOServer is selected as the existing I O Server in the second step Express Communications Wizard Express Communications Wizard E This wizard sets up communications For an I O Device and optimises the runtime performance of the Device Select the I O Server you wish to work with You may create a new I O Server by entering the desired name or select from your existing I O Servers You can also use this wizard For the configuration of Disk I O Devices Create a new I O Server Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring I O Device continued Express Communications Wizard Select the I O Device you wish to work with You may create a new I O Device by entering the desired name or select from your existing I O Device IODev Cancel Help Disk I O Devices are serviced by the Citect I O Server which means all networked clients are looking at the same data Disk
185. f Monitoring In monitor mode nine types of monitoring can be carried out Monitor no Monitor contents Speed feedback Torque command Unit r min Explanation Displays actual rotational speed of motor The command to the current loop is displayed as 100 of the rated torque Number of pulses from U phase edge The number of pulses from the U phase edge is displayed in units of encoder resolution Displays pulse number with 1 4 turn being 1024 pulses with an error of approx 5 pulses Electrical angle Degrees Displays the electrical angle of the motor Internal status bit display 1 Internal status bit display 2 Displays Servo Driver internal information as either or not lit Command pulse speed display r min Displays the command pulse counter converted to a fre quency r min Position deviation deviation count er Input pulse count er Pulses Command units m Operation in Monitor Mode In order to conduct monitoring first go into monitor mode and then setthe monitor number and press the DATA Key The items in parentheses in the following explanation indicate operations using the Handy type Parameter Unit Displays the pulse count position deviation remaining on the deviation counter in command units based on input pulses Counts and displays the input pulses 3 DATA f 0 0 0
186. f you are having difficulty reading from the screen grabs here is the information in plain format Pump 1 CMD Data Type DIGITAL I O Device IODev Address D1 Name Raw Zero Raw Full Scale Scale Eng Zero Eng Full Scale Scale Eng Units Format Comment Pump 1 Command On Off 15 gt You can save a lot of time configuring tags by entering similar types of Tags together and just changing the parts that are different before pressing Add Use the mouse to highlight the parts that you want to change then just overtype Eg Pump_1_CMD can easily be changed to Pump_1_Mode Highlight CMD then type Mode For address based protocols if you arrange your variables in your PLC into blocks where all the Digitals are contiguous and all the Integers are contiguous then the performance will be significantly improved as the CitectSCADA software will be able to read large blocks of data in a single communication message instead of multiple messages TIP It does not matter what order the addresses are entered into the variables records what matters is the contiguous block of addresses in the PLC 16 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Tags continued amp E Variable Tags Tutorial to Variable Tag Name Pump_1_Mode 4 Cluster Name MyCluster I O Device Name IODew Address 2 DIGITAL h Raw Zero Scale Raw Full Scale 14 Eng Zero Scale En
187. for systems with low rigidity or systems with intrinsically low frequency vibration 5 19 Specifications Chapter 5 The setting range is 1 to 500 1 s and the factory setting is 40 1 s e Positioning Completed Range Cn 1b This sets the deviation counter value for outputting the positioning completed output INP When the deviation counter value falls below this setting the positioning completed output turns ON The setting range is 0 to 250 command units and the factory setting is 3 command units e Electronic Gear Ratio G1 Numerator Cn 24 Electronic Gear Ratio G2 Denominator Cn 25 The motor will be operated by the pulses resulting from the number of command pulses multiplied by the gear ratio G1 G2 The setting range for both G1 and G2 is 65 535 and the settings are restricted as follows 1 100 G1 G2 100 The factory setting is G1 24 G2 1 i e an electronic gear ratio of 4 1 At the factory setting inputting 1 024 pulses will cause one Servomotor revolution e Position Command Acceleration Deceleration Time Constant Cn 26 This executes smoothing processing on command pulses for Servomotor operation It is valid in the following cases There is no acceleration or deceleration for command pulses The command pulse frequency changes suddenly electronic gear ratio setting is large G1 G2 10 The setting range is O to 640 x 0 1 ms and the factory setting is O x 0 1 ms
188. from the armature ofthe Servomotor With inverter leakage break ers high frequency current is not detected preventing the breaker from operating due to leakage cur rent Another way to prevent leakage current from being detected is to install an insulating transformer When selecting leakage breakers remember to also add the leakage current from devices other than the Servomotor such as machines using a switching power supply noise filters inverters and so on The following table shows the Servomotor leakage currents for each Servo Driver Coil voltage Driver Leakage current direct including high frequency current Leakage current resistor capaci tor in commercial power supply frequency range R88D UEPOAH to UEPO8H 80 3 mA 8 2 50 mA RS5D UEP20H 10 mA 2 25 System Design Installation Chapter 2 Note 1 Leakage current values shown above are for motor power lines of 10 m or less The values will change depending on the length of power cables and the insulation Note 2 Leakage current values shown above are for normal temperatures and humidity The values will change depending on the temperature and humidity Note 3 Leakage current for 100 VAC input Servomotors is approximately half that of the values shown above m Improving Encoder Cable Noise Resistance Signals from the encoder are either A B or S phase The frequency for A or B phase signals is 76 8 kHz max whi
189. g Full Scale Eng Units Format Deadband Comment Pump 1 mode 0 auto 1 Manual Replace Delete J Help J Record 2 Record added Linked No Variable Pump 1 Mode Data DIGITAL Tag Name Type I O IODev Address D2 Device Name Raw Zero Raw Full Scale Scale Eng Zero Eng Full Scale Scale Eng Units Format Comment Pump 1 Mode 0 Auto 1 Manual E Variable Tags Tutorial Pump 1 Speed Variable Tag Name Cluster Name MyCluster I O Device Name 10Dev Address H I INT gt Raw Zero Scale 0 Raw Full Scale 32767 14 Eng Zero Scale 0 Eng Full Scale 500 Eng Units RPM Format EU Deadband 0 Comment Pump 1 Speed 0 500 rpm Replace Delete J Help Record 3 Record added Linked No Variable Pump 1 Speed Data INT Tag Name Type I O IODev Address I1 Device Name Raw Zero 0 Raw Full 32767 Scale Scale Eng Zero 0 Eng Full 500 0 Scale Scale Eng Units RPM Format HEU Comment Pump 1 Speed 0 500 rpm NOTE For the Format field EU needs to be typed up after When you are finished use the scroll bar on the right to scroll through each tag record and double check that you have entered the correct information On the last tag check that the number of tags records 3 CitectSCADA autom
190. g the power supply Operation will start as soon as the alarm is cleared if the alarm is cleared while the Run command RUN is ON possibly creating a dangerous situation Turn OFF the Run command before clearing alarms Take adequate safety precautions if an alarm is going to be cleared while the Run command is ON or when the Servo Always ON Cn 01 bit O set to 1 is used 4 9 Application Chapter 4 4 2 3 Overload Characteristics Electron Thermal Characteristics Anoverload protection function electron thermal is built into the Servo Driver to protect against Servo Driver or Servomotor overload overload A 70 does occur first clear the cause of the error and then wait atleast one minute forthe Servomotor temperature to drop before turning on the power again If the power is turned on again too soon the Servomotor coil may be damaged m Overload Characteristic Graph The characteristic between the load ratio and the electronic thermal operating time is shown in the fol lowing graph 1000 300 100 30 Operation time s 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 Load ratio Note 1 The load ratio is calculated in relation to the Servomotor s rated current Servomotor current Load ratio x 100 Servomotor rated current Note 2 Forexample if acurrentthree times the rated motor current is applied continuously and over load will be detected in approximately 3 s 4 1
191. ge ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH with no condensation Storage and operating No corrosive gasses atmosphere Vibration resistance 4 9 m s 0 5 G max Impact resistance Acceleration 19 6 m s 2 G max e Performance Specifications Externally connected regeneration 47 5 resistance Error detection function Regeneration resistance disconnection regeneration transistor damage overvoltage Alarm output SPST NC contact open contact at time of protective function operation 200 VAC drive possible External dimensions 55 x 160 x 130 W x H x D e Indicator LED Specifications Specifications POWER Lit while power flows between P and N terminals REGEN Lit during regeneration operation ALARM REGEN Lit for regeneration resistance disconnection or regeneration transistor damage ALARM OV Lit when overvoltage occurs Note 1 When the error detection function operates an alarm is output from the Unit Note 2 Create sequence so that the power supply R T to the Servo Driver is cut off when an alarm is generated Note 3 Whenthe error detection function operates and the Servo Driver s power supply is cut off the Regeneration Unit won t be restored to its normal status until 2 to 3 seconds have elapsed even if the power supply is turned on again Normal status is restored after the electrolytic capacitor in the Servo Driver has been discharged and the voltage between P and N d
192. gle that covers all the things you have drawn so far or copy the one you already have on the page Set the Line color to Light Grey see next page Check the Filled check box and set the Filled color to Light Grey also Set the Corner Radius to 8 and activate the Gradient Fill with a medium grey hue Rectangle Properties Appearance Movement Scalina Fill Input Slider Access Line Object type 9 2 Width H 4 E gt r eo Style Solid 7 2 a a wh 3 Fill Gradient M Filled Gradient Fill de En IN Drecton masa Cancel Apply Help Click on 3D Effects tab and select Lowered Since it will be difficult to see your work with the large rectangle in front of it we need to send it to the back Make sure the new rectangle is selected then click on the Send to Back E button on the Tool Bar or select Send to Back from the Arrange menu Click OK when finished Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps Piping Next we will add a picture of the pump and some piping Click on the Symbol Set tool Click below the new rectangle to place the symbol set on the page Click on the Set button next to the OFF Symbol edit box to change the Off symbol from a black light to a red pump In the Library list use the scroll bars to scroll down and then click on pump base xlarge In the Symbol window Double Click on the left re
193. gt Note This is an average value G9S OMRON G9S G9S 301 3 62 61 2 76 max 2 99 B G9S 321 T G9S 501 Twenty four M3 5 5 9 111 max 4 37 4 13 G9S OMRON G9S Installation INTERNAL CONNECTIONS G9S 2001 95 2002 OFF delay Es OFF delay i timer a 1 14 G9S Precautions WIRING Be sure to turn off the G9S before wiring the G9S Do not touch the terminals of the G9S while the power is turned on because the terminals are charged and may cause an electric shock Use the following to wire the G9S Strand wire 0 75 to 1 5 mm2 16 to 18 AWG Steel wire 1 0 to 1 5 mm2 16 to 18 AWG Tighten each screw to
194. hapter 5 e Encoder Power Supply Grounds 1 to 3 EOV and Encoder Power Supply 5 V E5V 4 to 6 Outputs 5 2 0 1 V as the power supply for the Servomotor encoder The encoder power supply can not be used for other purposes CN3 Parameter Unit Input Specifications PinNo Signal name Function I O interface Transmission data Transmission data This is the send data line driver output to the Parameter Unit or a personal computer Reception data This is the send data line driver input from the Parameter Unit or a personal computer Reception data Unit switching This is the switching terminal for a Parameter Unit or personal computer If the pin is open it is for a personal computer If connected to 5V it is for a Parameter Unit This is the termination resistance terminal for the line receiver For 1 to 1 communications or for the final Servo Driver short circuit RT1 RT2 This is the 5 V output to the Parameter Unit Termination resistance enabled disabled 5 V output Ground e Pin Arrangement Transmission 1 data 4 6 Termination 2 TXD Transmission resistance data on off 7 RT2 Rxp Reception data 8 5V 5 V output Reception 4 RXD qata 9 GND Ground Unit 5 switching e Connectors Used D sub Connector 9 Pin Dai ichi Denshi Kogyo Socket at Servo
195. he control power supply wiring is long noise resistance be improved by adding 1 uF laminated ceramic capacitors between the control power supply and ground at the Servo Driver input section and the controller output section For encoder output Z phase lines be sure to use twisted pair shielded cable and connect both ends of the shield wire to ground 2 37 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 3 4 Peripheral Device Connection Examples m Connecting to Peripheral Devices R T Single phase 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLILIV 2 Single phase 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLILW o o MCCB 1 2 Noise filter E Mn Main circuit 2 power supply ON Main circuit connector OFF L NS Class 3 ground 1MC X Surge killer x Poy ee PL Servo error display 1MC oa a R88A CAU001 9 amp OMNUC U series UE model CAUO1B OMNUC U series UE model AC Servo Driver Power Cable AC Servomotor TREA N T24AVDC T BJ LS L1 1 TAN E 12 v gt ES CN1 M 2 34ALM w 4 88 ALMCOM DO x Class 3 ground PEN 2 2 to 100 Q or less 1 9 CN2 R88gA CRUD
196. he momentary maximum radial and thrust loads static pressure Servomotor Momentary allowable radial load static pressure n n 176 176 176 392 allowable thrust Allowable thrust load Allowable radial load Momentary load static pressure N ar L N OW 13 78 8 54 5 5 Note 1 The allowable loads are the same for motors with brakes Note 2 The allowable radial load is the value at a point 5 mm from the end of the shaft Note taken as a criteria Note 4 The service life of bearing grease is Radial load E gt Thrust load 5 mm 3 The allowable radial and thrust loads are values determined with a service life of 20 000 hours 20 000 hours at a Servomotor ambient temperature of 40 C and under the rated operating conditions Note 5 Absolutely do not impact the Servomotor or the output shaft by striking them with an imple ment such as a hammer Doing so will damage the Servomotor and encoder bearings 5 26 Specifications Chapter 5 Note 6 Make sure that the radial load is within the allowable range when there is a radial load applied Ifthe Servomotor is operated at more than the allowable radial load the shaft may suffer dam age due to fatigue Note 7 Applying an excessive load even once can damage the bearings and eventually cause a breakdown 5 2 5 Encoder Specifications em
197. hen use Alt Tab until it appears CitectSCADA allows you to quickly and easily switch between different projects simply by selecting them in the Project List TIP Make sure all pages are saved or closed in the Graphics Builder before changing projects When you backup a project everything related to that project including Cicode or VBA script is backed up and easily transported to other computers The only exception is any 3 party items which need to be installed separately such as ActiveX objects TIP When networking your System the project does not need to be copied to every computer Refer projects Managing your projects Linking projects Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Clusters continued In the Clusters form that appears define a cluster called MyCluster give it an appropriate description in the Comment field then Click Add File Edit Tags Alarms System Communication Servers Tools Window Help a amp S PaE 5 e Selma el Cluster Name MyCluster Comment Quickstart Tutorial cluster T Close the Clusters window by clicking on the or pressing ESC From the pull down menu at the top of the Citect Project Editor click on Servers then Network Addresses File Edit Tags Alarms System Communication EEE Ela Clusters Network Addresses Alarm Servers Report Servers Trend Servers VO Servers IMPORTANT Do N
198. hich will allow our cursor to snap to uniformly positioned locations on the screen The Grid is not a necessary making it easier to size and position objects in relation to each other item for configuring graphics pages however it vastly On the toolbar click View then Grid Setup increases the ability to create uniform sized and positioned objects which in turn makes amp Citect Graphics Builder Tutorial MyPage your pages easier to El File Edit Objects Tex Arrange Tools visualize Refresh If the Grid prevents you from meu Grid Setup positioning an object exactly Snap to Grid gt F8 where you want it it can be O J Guidelines Setup toggled on and off using the 5 Snap to Guidelines F7 F8 key v Show Tool Bar v Show Tools B Show Zoom F10 v Show Status Bar v Show Scroll Bars Cross Hair Cursor Mouse Slow Speed v Cursor Keys Slow Speed In the Grid Setup form change the size of the grid from 8 x 8 pixels to 5 x 5 pixels as shown below Select Snap to Grid and then click OK to close the form Gad Setup EX Pitch Origin Horizontal x Horizontal x vertical y vertical y Display Grid Snap to Grid Cancel Help Now we are ready to create and position our graphics objects 21 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics pages Configuring buttons Next we will configure some buttons to control the mode of the pump On the
199. high level of regenerative energy See note Motor connection Red These are the output terminals to the Servomotor Be careful to wire terminals them correctly Frame ground The ground terminal for both the motor output and power supply in put Ground to a class 3 ground to 100 9 or less or better Note Refer to 3 8 Hegenerative Energy Absorption for a method to calculate regeneration energy 2 20 System Design Installation Chapter 2 m Terminal Block Current and Wire Sizes The following table shows the rated effective currents flowing to the Servo Driver and the sizes of the electrical wires e Servo Drivers with 200 VAC Input R88D UEP H Driver Watts R88D UEPOAH 100 W R88D UEPOSH 200 W R88D UEP12H 400 W Power supply input 2 5 A 4 0 A 6 0 A 11 0A current R T Motor output cur 0 87 A 2 0A 2 6A 4 4A rent U V W Power supply input 0 75 mm or AWG 18 min 1 25 mm terminal wire size Motor output 0 5 mm or AWG 20 AWG 20 see note to AWG 18 terminal wire size Use OMRON standard cable The applicable wire size for motor connectors is AWG22 to AWG18 Ground terminal Use 2 0 mm external ground wires Use the same wire as used for the motor output wire size Note Ifthe cable length is 15 meters or longer for a 750 W Servomotor the momentary maximum torque at rota tion speeds of 2 500 r min or higher may drop by approximately 796 e Servo Dr
200. his computer to behave within your overall CitectSCADA network Switch to the Citect Project Editor using Alt Tab From the File menu select Compile File Edit Tags Alarms System Alternatively you can use the compile button on the menu bar Compile Alt F10 Compile Errors gt Ctrl E Pack Print Exit Alt F4 You should see a compilation progress bar followed by a Compilation Success popup Citect Compiler Citect Compiler Version 7 10 232 n Compilation successful Copyright c Citect Pty Ltd 1387 2008 E 0warning s detected Database PGDYNOB Record 245 Cancel Page x If your compilation fails you can double click on an error from the list provided to take you directly to the location of the incorrect configuration or you can review your work using this document to ensure that you have performed all steps correctly Computer Setup Wizard is typically run only once per project for each computer on which CitectSCADA will run 36 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Testing Graphics Pages Computer Setup Wizard continued We will now setup our Computer s role within the CitectSCADA network Switch to Citect Explorer using Alt Tab In the Project List tree make sure the Tutorial project is selected In the menu bar click the Computer Setup button Tutorial Citect Explorer File View Tools Help Mara 18 smi amp lt js el tol ex ss 68 sz Pro
201. ications with a PLC Adding and Configuring tags Creating New Graphics pages Use Templates Button Commands 21 Disabling Buttons Dynamic Symbols Drawing objects A Manipulating objects Copy Paste Align Send to Back Color Fill Control Commands Setting values Drawing Text Displaying analog values Drawing Pipes Grouping Objects Defining Alarms Configure an alarm page Storing Trend Data Configuring a trend page Operating Runtime Displays W Applying Security m Using Administration Tools Creating Runtime Menus lt Tag Debug Utility m Backing up and restoring a project Disclaimer Citect Pty Ltd makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this manual and to the extent permitted by law expressly limits its liability for breach of any warranty that may be implied to the replacement of this manual with another Citect Pty Ltd assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be in this document and reserves the right to revise this document at any time without incurring an obligation to notify any person of the revision Copyright O October 2008 Citect Pty Ltd All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced photocopied or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Citect Pty Ltd Trademarks Citect CitectHMI CitectSCADA CitectSCADA Reports Citect
202. ider the operating environment and other conditions affecting the service life Do not set any parameter not described in this manual otherwise the Servomotor or Servo Driver may malfunction Contact your OMRON representatives if you have any inquiry NOTICE Before using the product under the following conditions consult your OMRON representatives make sure thatthe ratings and performance characteristics of the product are good enough for the systems machines or equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines or equipment with double safety mechanisms 1 Conditions not described in the manual 2 The application of the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems ve hicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement machines or safety equipment 3 Theapplication ofthe productto systems machines or equipmentthat may have a serious influence on human life and property if they are used improperly Items to Check After Unpacking Check the following items after removing the product from the package Has the correct product been delivered i e the correct model number and specifications Has the product been damaged in shipping The product is provided with this manual No connectors or mounting screws are provided omnon USER S MANUAL OMNUC U MODELS R88M UE AC Servomotors MODELS R88D UEP AC Servo Drivers AC SERVOMOTORS DRIVERS
203. ier Fy FV mel on r Py on a Phases nl A phase 2 Throw Jg 1 companion zi Tange walle 3 10000 i 4 Iun T Taro d lt Tange 2 2507 A ki 160 Tanz vium 2 q EE e 2 Tami 3 4 10000 wakin 1 2500 AN gt m 1 Tam 21 40 2 TI Tubs d Bon pa o inler bi patties wg g 7 FO Aa a 0100 He Seiad 12 O5 1 ala is External Serie fae 5 500 ON 24 HT dp x Dn OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR CQMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 11 2 41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH Z3 Meum LE Pili Cir SOM Hil B UL pati M 0000 0003 Tres Condiciones de Comparaci n M 0001 2500 Valor Objeto 1 2500 M 0002 0000 0003 0100 Bit de Salida Externa 1 M 0004 7500 Valor Objeto 2 7500 M 0005 0000 M 0006 0201 Bit de Salida Externa 2 y Bit de Salida Interna 0 DM 0007 0000 Valor Objeto 3 10000 flemus ON DM 0008 0001 0009 0402 Bit Salida Externa 3 y Bit de Salida Interna 1 DLE OH VUUVUUUUU 2 fms ean TAD d iquat FIG
204. ies dialog popup Tet Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access Effects None Depth 1 e Shadowed Shadow color I Lowered C Embossed 8 nlgA Amas Cancel Ap Hep Save your page Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Numbers On the Toolbox click on the number tool Click to place the number below the gradient rectangle The Number tool is actually the Text tool When you access it via the number tool icon you are presented with the Display Value sheet instead of the General Appearance sheet Use the Insert Tag button to enter the tag Pump_1_Speed Leave the data format field to the default and the format you specified in the tag definition will be used Text Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access S x Numeric expression 3 C On off Pump_1_Speed x 5 C Multi state P C Array Numeric F String 2 Format lt 2 7 2 8 Clear Property Cancel Apply Help Click on the General tab on the right hand side and set the font to Black 12 point then Click OK Creating Graphics Pages 3D rectangles 46 47 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Next we ll add some cosmetics to make the display more appealing Draw large rectan
205. if they are wired under the conditions described in this section If 2 31 System Design Installation Chapter 2 the connected devices wiring and other conditions cannot be made to tulfill the installation and wiring conditions when the product is incorporated into a machine the compliance of the overall machine must be confirmed The following conditions must be met to conform to EMC Directives The Servo Driver must be installed in a metal case control panel Noise filters and surge adsorbers must be installed on all power supply lines e Shielded cables must be used for all I O signal lines and encoder lines Use tin plated soft copper wires for the shield weaving All cables leaving the control panel must be wired in metal ducts or conduits with blades Ferrite cores must be attached to the shielded cable and the shield must be clamped directly to the ground plate to ground it m Wiring Methods Control Panel Device Containing Servomotor Metal plate Noise Brake pow i ilter ersuply 253 PX Metal NN Metal AC power duct or Suge NN duct supply conduit 1 MCCB absor
206. imum Write Request Reset Write Physical Time Keeping 10 22 2008 Start Date 10 22 2008 09 52 48 AM Start Time 09 15 14 Run Time 0 Days 0 Hours 37 min 34 sec Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Administrative Tools Configuring the Menu Citect Configuration 8 Explorer amp Ini System Setup 24 Configure Menu al Configu Configure Menubar amp Configure 2 Eotgae YE Runtime Manager In the Citect Configuration box select Configure Menu Menu Configuration E a Button Pages Pages hem MyPage Mend Trends Update Page List Men Alarms Meno Trends Mend Tools Single Trend Double Trend lem Popup Trend Jem Instant Trend Configure Trend Groups ed Alarms tem Active Alarms dem Alarm Summary Xem Disabled Alarms dem Hardware Alarms Configure Alarm Groups Tools Admin Tools dm Tag Debug i Right Click to edit menu Note You must have the appropriate privilege level Expand the menu system by clicking on each item Each menu Button is a separate pull down menu on the navigation bar By right clicking on each item you can modify the items in its pull down menu Menu Configuration Right click on Pages under the Generic node J Generic E E entire Pages pull down menu We will now create our own Pages menu iten Select Delete Button from the available options This will r
207. in Shorten the control signal lines Separate control signal lines from power supply lines Use a low impedance power supply for control signals 4 13 Application Chapter 4 m Error Diagnosis by Means of Alarm Display Parameter Unit Alarm Error content display Parameter cor ruption Parameter set ting error Condition when error oc curred Occurred when power was turned on Occurred when power was turned on Occurred when power was turned on Occurred when Servo was turned on Probable cause Internal memory error A user parameter was set to a value outside of the set ting range previously Control board defective Control board defective Current feedback circuit error Main circuit transistor module error Servomotor power line is short circuited or grounded Countermeasures Replace Servo Driver Change the user parameter setting so it is within the set ting range Replace Servo Driver Replace Servo Driver Replace Servo Driver Correct the power line short circuiting or ground ing Measure the insulation re sistance at the Servomo tor itself If there is short circuiting replace the Ser vomotor There is faulty wiring at the U V or W phase or the GR Correct the wiring Servomotor coil are dam aged Measure the winding resis tance If the coil are dam aged replace the Servomo tor Deviation coun
208. in 32 Z Z phase ented ut output ncoder 15 Salndecel 33 ZCOM Z phase out Forward put ground 16 POT rotation drive 34 ALM Alarm prohibit input Reverse output Alarm 17 rotation drive 35 ALMCOM output prohibit input FG GND 18 EE reset 36_ see note groun RUN e Run Command 14 RUN This is the input that turns on the power drive circuit for the main circuit of the Servo Driver If this signal is not input i e servo off status the Servomotor cannot operate Depending on the setting of setup pa 5 10 To other input circuit GNDs To other input circuits Specifications Chapter 5 rameter Cn 01 bit no 0 this signal can be bypassed In that case the servo will be turned on after the power is turned on e Gain Reduction 15 MING Input this signal to lower the loop gain for the control loop and to weaken servo rigidity repellant force with respect to external force In addition when parts are inserted after positioning the insertion operation is made easier because the repellant force with respect to external force is weakened by the inputting of this signal This cannot be used for the vertical shaft where a gravity load is applied because position deviation will occur e Forward Drive Prohibit 16 POT Cn 01 bit No 2 0 Reverse Drive Prohibit 17 NOT Cn 01 bit No 3 0 These two signals are the inputs for forward and rev
209. in This time they will work You will notice that the alarm changes color once acknowledged and disappears when you return the pump to automatic If the pump returns to automatic and you have not acknowledged the alarm it will remain on the screen until you do acknowledge it This ensures that the operator never misses an alarm incident 63 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime Trends ial MyPage MyPage Pages Trends Alarms Tools Single Trend Double Trend Popup Trend Instant Trend Configure Trend Groups From the navigation menu select Configure Trend Groups from the Trends navigation menu Type in a name for your first trend group nominally Pump_1 Then use the build buttons to add Pump_1_Speed to the group Configure Trend Groups Description Trend Pen 1 Trend Pen 2 Trend Pen 3 Trend Pen 4 Trend Pen 5 Trend Pen 6 Trend Pen 7 Trend Pen 8 Area Add Pump_1_Speed 1 fJ L E L L U lll LJ E When you are finished click Add then close the window by clicking on the icon Now select Single Trend from the Trends navigation menu Use the Trend Groups button to select a trend group for display By manipulating the pump speed via the slider on MyPage you should now see the trend value changing on the graph There are many powerful features available on this page including m Trend cursor Click and slide along the graph to locate the cursor which display
210. ing illustration The noise filter should be installed at the entrance to the control panel whenever possible Good Separate input and output NO Noise not filtered effectively po du 3 1 3 AC input NF E AC output ACinput NF E 2 4 2 4 Ground Ground AC output 2 22 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 Use twisted pair cables for the power supply cables whenever possible or bind the cables Driver or f Driver Binding Separate power supply cables and signal cables when wiring m Selecting Components This section describes the standards used to select components required to increase noise resistance Select these components based on their capacities performances and applicable ranges Recommended components have been listed refer to the manufacturer of each component for details e No fuse Breakers MCCB When selecting no fuse breakers take into consideration the maximum input current and the inrush current The momentary maximum output for a servo system is approximately three times that of the rated output and a maximum output of three seconds can be executed Therefore select no fuse breakers with an operating time of at least five seconds at 30096 of the rated maximum output General purpose and low speed no fuse breakers are generally suitable Refer to the table in 2 2 3 Terminal Block Wiring for
211. ion Control Module Cable for C200HW Servo Terminal Block for for one axis for C200H NC113 C200HW NC113 C200HW NC113 XW2Z LILIL1J A6 XW2B 20J6 1B see note 1 Position Control Module Cable for C200H NC211 Servo Terminal Block for for two axis for C200H C200H NC211 C200H NC211 XW2Z J A2 XW2B 40J6 2B see note 1 see note 5 see note 5 Position Control Module Cable for C200HW NC213 Servo Terminal Block for for two axes four axes two axes and C200HW C200HW NC213 two axes and for C200HW 413 four axes C200HW NC413 four axes C200HW NC213 XW2Z J A7 XW2B 40J6 2B see note 4 C200HW NC413 see note 3 see note 3 CQM1 for one two axes Cable for Servo Terminal Unit for CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 1 43 XW2Z J A3 XW2B 20J6 3 see note 1 Note 1 Has the functions of the conventional XW2B 20J6 1 XW2B 40J6 2 and XW2B 20J6 3 2 Two cables will be required on the Servo driver side if the C200H NC211 for two axes is used 3 Two cables each are required on the Servo Terminal Block and Position Control Module side and on the Servo Driver side if the CQM1 CPU43 EV1 is used for two axes 4 Two cables each will be required on the Servo Terminal Block and Position Control Module side and on the Servo Driver side if the C200HW NC413 four axes is use
212. ivers with 100 VAC Input R88D UEP L RBED UEPTAL 200 W R86D UEPTSL 300 W Power supply input current R T 4 5 Motor output current U V W 2 2 A Power supply input terminal wire 0 75 mm or AWG 18 size min Motor output terminal wire size AWG 20 to AWG 18 Use OMRON standard cable The applicable wire size for motor connectors is AWG22 to AWG18 Ground terminal wire size Use 2 0 mm2 external ground wires Use the same wire as used for the motor output m Wire Sizes and Allowable Current The following table shows allowable currents when there are three electrical wires Use values equal to or lower than the specified values e Heat resistant Vinyl Wiring UL1007 Rated Temperature 80 C Reference Value Nominal cross Configuration Conductive Allowable current A for wires mm resistance ambient temperature iud is 2 fos 19 0 18 des 58 Jas 09 mo o 85 js os ma 77 bo 2 21 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 2 4 Wiring for Noise Resistance m Wiring Method Noise resistance will vary greatly depending on the wiring method used Resistance to noise can be increased by paying attention to the items described below
213. ives e R88D UEPOAV UEPOSV 200 VAC 100 200 W R88D UEP10W 100 VAC 100 W e R88D UEP12V 200 VAC 400 W R88D UEP12W 100 VAC 200 W S 2 6 stem Design and Installation R88D UEP20V 200 VAC 750 W R88D UEP15W 100 VAC 300 W 160 Chapter 2 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m Regeneration Unit e R88A RG08UA System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m Parameter Units e R88A PRO2U Two 4 5 dia elajaleja e R88A PRO3U 2 8 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m AC Servomotors Non conforming Models e 100 W Standard Models 1 R88M UE10030H S1 R88M UE10030L S1 300 30 Encoder adapter Motor plug Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 8h6 dia 119 5 e 100 W Models with Brake R88M UE10030H BS1 R88M UE10030L BS1 300 30 Encoder adapter Motor plu Shaft Edge The key groove is in accordance with JIS B1301 1976 Two 4 3 dia FRUI RS s 2 1 8 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 e 200 W 300 W 400 W Standard Models R88M UE20030H S1 R88M UE40030H S1 R88M UE20030L S1 R88M UE30030L S1 3002 30 Encoder adapter Motor plug Shaft Edge Dimension The key groove is in accordance with JIS B130
214. ject List E My Projects CSV Example 8 Example E E Tags 5 Alarms ES System 4 Communications 5 Cicode Files 03 CitectvBA Files Contents of Tutorial Bb BB B Graphics Tags Alarms System Communic Cicode Files CitectvBA Files Sets up this computer for running Citect This wizard will assist you in setting up and customizing your computer for use with Citect Select the type of setup you require Express Setup Check Express Setup then click Next Custom Setup Project Setup J Select a compiled project that this computer will run Project Name Click the Project Name Drop Down and select Tutorial then click Next Tutorial Ad Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Testing Graphics Pages Computer Setup Wizard continued Computer Role Setup Back ach EE The minimum role of this computer is determined by matching its IP address with the server addresses configured in your project Select the role of this computer Server and Control Client Control IV Ful Lic View only Client Note If no servers match this computer then this computer must be a client cms Network Setup a Select the primary networking model For this machine G No networking Back Cancel Help Citect Computer Setup isk You
215. justing Gain 250 r min Approx 1 1 s Approx 0 7 s gt gt 3 22 Operation Chapter 3 3 7 2 Manually Adjusting Gain m Gain Adjustment Flowchart Perform auto tuning to match the rigid ity of the mechanical system Y The motor hunts when servo locked YES Accompanied by a hunting noise y NO Raise the rigidity selection to the value Decrease the rigidity selection so just before hunting occurs and perform hunting doesn t occur and perform auto tuning auto tuning Do characteristics such as positioning YES time meet system specifications End adjustment Increase Cn 04 speed loop gain to a value where hunting doesn t occur in servo lock Decrease Cn 05 speed loop integra tion time constant to a value where hunting doesn t occur in servo lock Does hunting vibration occur YES when the motor is operated NO Run the motor and monitor its opera Decrease Cn 04 speed loop gain tion Increase Cn 1A position loop gain Increase Cn 05 speed loop integra but do not increase it so far that over tion time constant shooting occurs L When vibration can t be eliminated despite several adjustments or positioning is too slow End adjustment Increase Cn 17 torque command filter time constant
216. l Cable a of Cable Length L Outer diameter of sheath R88A NL S im 9 9 dia R88A CPUOO28 2 e Connection Configuration Position Control Unit mounted on a SYSMAC C CV series PC OMNUC U Series UE model AC Servomotor Driver 5 30 Specifications Chapter 5 e Wiring BF dl arrangement color color Arrangement 1 Black CW 1 19 2 Red CW 3 Black CCW S Sos 4 Red CCW 6 7 24 25 5 Black ECRST 8 9 26 27 6 Red ECRST 7 Black BKIR 12 13 30 31 8 Red INP 14 15 32 33 9 pm Bak DEl 10 Pink Red OGND 18 36 Hl Gray Connector plug model Red 10136 3000VE 13 Orange 24VIN Sumitomo 3M Orange Red Connector case model 10336 52A0 008 Hed Sumitomo 3M 15 i Red 18 i 0 2 3 RESET 2 Yellow 2 2 2 2 2 Bed 2 p E E S AAA p Black Z ZCOM A LM ALMCOM FG 6 7 6 7 White Shield Cable AWG24X18P 5 31 Specifications Chapter 5 5 3 2 Encoder Cable m Encoder Cables for Non conforming Models e Types of Cable Length L Outer diameter of sheath 3m 8 dia R88A CRU003C R88A CRU005C R88A CRU010C R88A CRU015C R88A CRU020C Up to a maximum of 20 m between the Monitor and the Servo Driver e Connection Configuration O
217. l PV Comienzo de la Comparaci n LECTURA DEL PV PRV 62 Lectura del PV del Contador de Alta Velocidad y el Estado de la Comparaci n GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 8 2 COM1H CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL Switches para el Nivel de Tensi n de las Entradas Contador 1 Contador 2 Contador 3 Contador 4 Estado Configuraci n SW6 1 SW6 2 SW3 1 SW3 2 Entrada del Contador Entrada de Tensi n A 24 VDC defecto SW5 1 SW5 2 SW2 1 SW2 2 Entrada del Contador Entrada de Tensi n B 24 VDC defecto SW4 1 SW4 2 SW1 1 SW1 2 Entrada del Contador Entrada de Tensi n Z 24 VDC defecto Lah skis af Barri r p Phage High pred 1 E i High apago COLMA z re its Ma D High spied countar 1 Lj 44 al High bhiad 2 EN 17 Z cow mer Phase Z couniar 1 Highspeed counter 2 ER af zz gus Phase High spied catantar 3 Mia fale 1 1 ni con D High sped counter d Eu Phases B High sposd aauntar 3 High speed capter d p 9 1 Phasa Z Highspsarn couniar 3 Highs contar 4 Pineado de los Conectores CN1 y CN2 Situaci n de los Pines N de Pin Nombre Salida Externa 2 Salida Externa 1 Entrada de Contador 1 Z Entrada de Contador 1 Z e 6 Be Entrada de Contador 1 B 8 HA _ Entradade Contador 1 A DC Alimentaci
218. ld after the brake power supply has been turned off When using itfor the vertical shaft take this delay into account and set brake timing 1 Cn 12 so that the Servomotor will not receive power until after the brake is held e Timing for Power Supply When Servomotor is Stopped Power supply en OF s 55 to 75 ms signal BKIR OFF Cn 12 see note Powerto Power on motor Power off Note Ittakes up to 100 ms for the brake to be held after the brake power supply has been turned off When using it for the vertical shaft take this delay into account and set brake timing 1 Cn 12 so that the Servomotor will not receive power until after the brake is held 3 16 Operation Chapter 3 e Timing for Run Command RUN Errors Power Supply Servomotor Stopped Power supply j RUN OFF Alarm output E See note 2 BKIR OFF Powerto motor Motor rotational speed Power on Power off Approx 10 ms See note 1 Braking by dynamic brake 100 r min Note 1 Forthe approximately 10 ms ittakes from when the power to the Servomotor turns off until the dynamic brake operates the Servomotor rotates by momentum Note 2 Ifthe motor rotational speed falls to 100 r min or below or if 500 ms elapse after power to the Servomotor is interrupted the brake interlock signal BKIR will turn OFF Note 3 The dynamic brake decelerates to
219. le for Users and Roles Global privileges assign access rights across all areas of the project 58 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 kernel I Built in kernel user I Te User Name Full Name Password Confirm Password eeeeee I Type Administrator I Global Privilege Comment Built in kernel user I Replace pete Record 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The password fields contain to hide passwords from prying eyes Do not type instead type citect into this field The asterixes or hidden characters will appear as you type This user has been configured for maximum security privileges throughout the project and will be able to access the advanced tools available from the navigation bar We will also add a Windows Administrator group and a Windows Restricted user with fewer privileges On the Project Editor Menu click on System then click on Roles File Edit Tags Alarms J aLla Communication Servers Tools Window Help Keyboard Commands Keyboard Keys Reports Events Accumulators Devices Users Roles Groups h Labels Fonts Parameters Included Projects Configure the Windows Administrator group to have full access across all areas of the project similar to the kernel user we have just added Configuring Security continued You can replace individual found items by and place If a gr
220. le the transmission speed for S phase signals is 307 kbps Follow the wiring meth ods outlined below to improve encoder noise resistance Be sure to use dedicated encoder cables If lines are interrupted in the middle be sure to connect them with connectors making sure that the cable insulation is not peeled off for more than 50 mm In addition be sure to use shielded wire Do not coil cables If cables are long and are coiled mutual induction and inductance will increase and will cause malfunctions Be sure to use cables fully extended When installing noise filters for encoder cables use ferrite cores The following table shows the rec ommended ferrite core models ESD OR 26 TDK Clamp filter ZCAT2032 0930 ZCAT3035 1330 ZCAT2035 0930A Do not wire the encoder cable in the same duct as power cables and control cables for brakes sole noids clutches and valves m Improving Control I O Signal Noise Resistance Position can be affected if control I O signals are influenced by noise Follow the methods outlined be low for the power supply and wiring e Use completely separate power supplies for the control power supply especially 12 to 24 VDC and the external operation power supply In particular be careful not to connect two power supply ground wires Install a noise filter on the primary side of the control power supply Use separate power supplies for control power and for power for the pulse command an
221. lect from a flexible range of colors for migrating from one hue to another as well as adjusting saturation and darkness at the same time This can be very useful when one color range does not translate well to another Use the Adjust Colors tool to change your purple tank to green and darken the hue by 20 r Hue degrees From Hue Range To Hue Range r Lightness 20 Selected Hues Only r Saturation 0 Selected Hues Only Cancel Help 55 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Accessing Alarm and Trend Display Pages gt CitectSCADA comes with a number of pre built pages If you do not specifically define these pages in your Unlike other SCADA project to create your own look and feel then CitectSCADA will use its defaults instead This includes packages Citect s Digital Alarms support a combination of two variable m Alam tags for alarming purposes m Summary Alarms This makes it easy to mask m Disabled Alarms alarms via a second PLC flag m Hardware Alarms eg area in maintenance m Trends mode without writing m Double Trends additional PLC m Popup Trends m Instant Trends m Administration Tools As well as the page template which we are already using which provides built in navigation and alarm shortlist features These pages provide comprehensive functionality and can be accessed directly from the navigation menu provided at the top of each page or via
222. lectronic signatures and user validation can be found in the online help OMRON Safety Relay Unit G9S Ideal for Safety Door and Emergency Stop Switch Circuits m Slim two pole models only 22 5 mm wide Three pole models only 68 mm wide Five pole models only 91 mm wide OFF delay feature in three pole models Incorporates LED indicators for monitoring relays Uses replaceable fuses Finger protection construction m Both DIN track mounting and screw ES mounting possible two pole models CE m Approved Standards Agency Standard File No EN60204 1 R974021 EN954 1 UL508 E95399 CSA22 2No 14 LR35535 Note sure to refer to the Precautions on page 15 Ordering Information BASIC MODELS Number of poles Main contact form Number of input channels Rated voltage Part number DPST NO 1 channel 24 VDC G9S 2001 DC24 2 channels G9S 2002 DC24 3PST NO 2 channels 24 VDC G9S 301 DC24 24 VAC G9S 301 AC24 120 VAC G9S 301 120 240 VAC G9S 301 AC240 5PST NO 24 VDC G9S 501 DC24 24 VAC G9S 501 AC24 120 VAC G9S 501 AC120 240 VAC G9S 501 240 Note Auxiliary contact is SPST NC G9S OMRON G9S OFF DELAY MODELS Number of poles Main contact OFF delay Number of input OFF delay time Rated voltage Part number form form channels 3 5 DPST NO 2 channels 1s 24 VDC G9S 321 T01 DC24
223. loop gain is 40 1 s so it should be lowered for systems with low rigidity Ifa system has low rigidity or low characteristic frequency increasing the position loop gain sympathetic vibration of machinery will occur and an alarm will be generated Position loop gain is generally expressed as follows Instruction command frequency pulses s Position loop gain Kp 1 s Deviation counter s residual pulse amount pulses The response is as shown in the following diagram when the position loop gain is manipulated High position loop gain md gn p pg Motor speed Low position loop gain Time Parameter name Factory Setting Explanation setting range Cn 1b Positioning comple 010250 Sets the range for the positioning comple tion signal output Generally set according to the precision required by the system Increasing the positioning completion range too much can cause the positioning completion output to turn ON during low speed operation or other times when there are few residual pulses e Feed forward Amount The feed forward amount is effective when the position loop gain is set to less than 25 l s It will not be very effective when the position loop gain is higher than 25 l s Increasing the feed forward amount to much will cause excessive overshooting The feed forward amount is not sent through the deviation counter but is applied directly to the speed loop The differential of the devi
224. m 4 75 m XW2C 20G5 IN16 XW2C 20G5 IN16 Reference Information CQM1H High Density Output Modules Output Relay Blocks CQM1 75 1 25 1 75 2 75 4 75 CQM1 0D213 32 NPN outputs G79 0100C 75 1 m 0 75 m G79 0150C 125 1 5 m 1 25 m G79 0200C 175 2 m 1 75 m G79 O300C 275 3 m 2 75 m G79 O500C 475 5 m 4 75 m OJOjOJOJOJO eee i ET ET OOO OOO OOO OOO OOO G70D VSOC16 G70A ZOC16 3 G2R 1 S N relays G7TC OC16 Relay Block or G70D SOC16 P7TF OS16 Block Base with G7T 1112S Relays or G3TA ODX02S SSRs Cable Solutions for Omron PLCs Operator Interface Terminals and CPM1A CPM2A 0 0 EAN C200H CN__0 EU 22 NT31C CN__0 EU for NT31C Port B only 115 I NT20S 600S NT21 31 631 CPM1 CIFO1 h 2 Serial Port Operator Interface Terminals and CPM2C PLC C200H CN 0 NT31C CN 0 EU for NT31C Port B only l 115
225. mate Approx 0 9 kg Approx 1 2 kg Approx 1 5 kg Capacity Maximum pulse frequency 200 kpps Position loop gain 1 to 500 1 s Electronic gear Electronic gear ratio setting range 0 01 lt G1 G2 100 G1 G2 1 to 65 535 Positioning completed range 0 to 250 command units Position acceleration deceleration 0 to 64 0 ms The same setting is used for acceleration and decel time constant eration Input sig Position command pulse input TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V nals see note Feed pulse and direction signal forward pulse and reverse pulse or 90 differential phase A and B phases signal set via parameter Pulse width See note Deviation counter reset TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V Sequence input 24 VDC 5 mA photocoupler input external power supply 12 to 24 VDC 30 mA min Output sig Position feedback output Z phase open collector output 30 VDC 20 mA nals 1 pulse revolution OFF on Z phase detection Sequence output Alarm output brake interlock positioning completion open collector outputs 30 VDC 50 mA External regeneration processing Required for regeneration of Required for regeneration of more than 30 times the motor s more than 20 times the motor s rotor inertia rotor inertia Protective functions Overcurrent grounding overload overvoltage overspeeding run away prevention transmission errors encoder error
226. may result in a fire or Servomotor malfunction Protect the product from excessive shock Not doing so may result in a product mal function Wire the system correctly Not doing so may result in an out of control Servomotor and injury Tighten mounting screws terminal screws and cable connector screws firmly Loose screws may result in a product malfunction Use crimp terminals when wiring Connecting bare twisted wires directly to terminals may result in fires Use the power supply voltages specified in this manual Incorrect voltages may damage the product Take steps to ensure that the rated power supply voltage is maintained in locations with poor power supply conditions Improper power supply voltages may damage the product NCaution NCaution NCaution N Caution Install safety measures such as circuit breakers to protect against shorts in external wiring Insufficient safety measures may result in fires Install a safety stop on each machine Not doing so may result in an injury A brake is not considered a safety stop Install an emergency stop to shut off power to the system instantly Not doing so may result in an injury Take sufficient measures to protect the product in the following locations Insufficient protection may damage the product Locations where static electricity and other noise is generated Locations subject to strong electromagnetic or magnetic fields Locations subject to radio
227. momento utilizando la instrucci n PMCR en el programa de diagrama de rel s de la CPU Con el CX Protocol y la tarjeta de comunicaciones serie se suministran protocolos est ndar para comunicar con dispositivos OMRON tales como controladores de temperatura procesadores inteligentes de sefial lectores de c digo de barras y m dems Los protocolos est ndar tambi n se pueden modificar con el CX Protocol para aplicaciones espec ficas ri PCR i Tarji Cos A COMM Diapositiva enn piiri R8 23906 Pane Manso Salaceionads on i macra d probe para las aapeclficaeaemes de comunita Chords requeridas 7 4 Especificaciones de la Tarjeta de Comunicaciones Serie Elemento Especificaciones Huecos de montaje y N mero de Se puede montar 1 tarjeta en el hueco 1 izquierdo Tarjetas Puertos de RS 232C 19 2 Kbps m x 15 m m x Comunicaciones RS 422A 485 19 2 Kbps m x 500 m m x Serie Protocolos Cada puerto se puede seleccionar independientemente a Puerto 2 modo Host Link Protocolo Libre Macro de Protocolo PC Link 1 1 NT Link 1 1 o NT Link 1 N 200 mA m x OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 27 PLC Cable and Wiring Guide Table of Contents Name Page Number PLC Connections 1 Cable Solutions for Omron PLCs 11 Cable Solutions for Multi Vendor PLCs 15 Reference Information PLC Connections The followi
228. motor Shafts 5 26 5 2 5 Encoder Specifications 5 27 9 3 Cable Specifications siii table Rages utu A ae A 5 28 5 3 1 Controller Connecting Cable 5 28 92322 Encoder Cable ondas io ia 44 FS ONS e aa sana kasi S 5 32 5 3 3 Power Cable rip AAA A AA AA A e RC PERS 5 34 5 4 Parameter Unit Specifications 5 38 5 5 Regeneration Unit Specifications 5 39 5 6 Front mounting Bracket Specifications 5 40 Chapter 6 Supplementary Materials 6 1 6 1 Connection Examples vii a eo CE eee eds teet tate teca 6 2 6 2 OMNUC U Series Standard Models 6 7 6 3 Parameter Setting Forms 2 2 6 10 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Features System Configuration Servo Driver Nomenclature EC Directives and Applicable Models Introduction Chapter 1 1 1 Features Servo Drivers controlthe power suppliedto AC Servomotors with pulse train input signals and perform precision position control There are 5 types of AC Servomotors 100 W 200 W 300 W
229. n auto or manual mode On the Toolbox click on the Symbol Set Tool Position the cursor next to the Manual button then click to place the symbol on the page In the ON symbol when edit box type Pump 1 Mode 1 Symbol Set Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access K Type ON symbol when o on off Pump_1_Mode 1 x 8 C Multi state Fi C Array C Animated z OFF symbol ON symbol Set Set 9 Cle Clear light 1 black light 1 red Clear Property Cancel Apply Help Click on the OFF symbol Set button to select a different symbol to display for this state A new popup form will be displayed with a list of symbol libraries to the right and thumbnails of the symbols within the selected library on the left Scroll down the libraries until you find the Lights Round library then Click on it to select it The thumbnails on the left will change 27 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Symbol Sets continued Select the Grey lightby Double Clicking on it This will replace the original black light with a new grey light for the off state of the animation Select Symbol wJ Symbol grey Library al Foodbev valves OK global 9 9 9 9 heat_exchange 1 Cancel heatcool 3 icons blue brown cyan green lights Edit linhte rewind New 9 9 9 9 grey o
230. n como origen la compensaci n se puede configurar en el Setup del PLG Frecuencia de cuenta 4 KHz m x Almacenamiento del PV de Puerto 1 IR233 parte de mayor peso e IR232 parte de menor peso los contadores Puerto 2 IR235 parte de mayor peso e IR234 parte de menor peso Los datos se almacenan como 4 d gitos en BCD Nota el rango de valores queda determinado por el modo de operaci n BCD o 360 y la resoluci n 8 10 12 bits M todos de Por Valor Se pueden registrar hasta 48 valores objeto e interrupciones Control Objeto Por Rangos de Se pueden almacenar hasta 8 l mites superiores l mites inferiores e Comparaci n interrupciones OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 18 5 COMIH AVB41 5 41 5 1 Funci n OMRON ELECTRONICS S A TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMTH AVB41 Tarjeta de selec ciones analogicas Potenci mealro Palanci meatra 1 Polencs metra 2 Palenei meatra 3 Se trata de una Tarjeta Opcional de Selectores Anal gicos La Tarjeta Opcional 41 es exactamente igual que los selectores que incorporaba el CQM1 CPU42 Se comporta del mismo modo se programa y pone en marcha de la misma forma y tienen las mismas caracter sticas Cada uno de los valores que representan la posici n en la que se encuentran los selectores anal gicos que son resistores variables localizados en el frente de la tarjeta se almacenan como
231. n para las Salidas Externas 1 a 4 5a24VDC OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR CQM1H MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 9 2 COM1H CTB41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL Situaci n delos Pines N de Pin 3 EntradadeContador3 Z 2 3Z EntadadeContador3 Z 3 3B EntadadeContador3 B 4 7 38 EntadadeContador3Be 5 3a Entradade Contador 3 A 6 3A _ EntadadeContador3 A 8 SOUT SalidaExema3 9 Ja EntadadeContador4 Z Alimentaci n para las Salidas Externas 1 a 4 OV Conexion de un Encoder de Colector Abierto de 24 VDC Cuntar Board in Phase Made i chi Pin Ho Entider A Power suppl 24 V OC Phase B Emi CONI ird Courier 3 input El i 8 Geur T 08 MN Orange Pe Counbar 1 inpul 2 4 W Phasa Z EBEZ CWZ BO Drown HPS Dpeneceobect r outputs Yr 3 Courbet Inc Z M E 24 v DC Peres de zou Dip no snare iha power supply swim amar tC Conexi n de un Encoder con Salida Line Driver High Bpaned Conner Board in Difesontal Phasa Mocs GM Black Pin Ho bone amp LABOR A 1 Encoder CC ear puk 4 ma d ri A Gan r W nk H i mp anqa Zt _ el AE puak r Loco Ex CWETK M em ue ay Cut ruri 2 w lina
232. n power line terminals and case 1 500 VAC for 1 min at 50 60 Hz Protective structure Built into panel Note 1 The above items reflect individual evaluation testing The results may differ under com pounded conditions Note 2 Absolutely do not conduct a withstand voltage test or a megger test on the Servo Driver If such tests are conducted internal elements may be damaged Note 3 Depending on the operating conditions some Servo Driver parts will require maintenance Refer to 4 4 Periodic Maintenance for details Note 4 The service life of the Servo Driver is 50 000 hours at an average ambient temperature of 50 at the rated torque and the rated rotation speed 5 2 Specifications Chapter 5 5 1 2 Performance Specifications m 200 VAC Input Servo Drivers Non conforming Models 0044000 uem UEP04H UEP08H UEP12H UEP20H 97 Single phase 200 230 170 to 253 50 60 Hz Control method All digital servo Speed feedback Optical encoder 1 024 pulses revolution Applicable load inertia Maximum of 30 times motor s ro Maximum of 20 times motor s ro tor inertia tor inertia Inverter method PWM method based on IGBT PWM frequency 11 kHz 7 8 kHz Applicable Servomotor R88M R88M R88M R88M UE10030H S1 UE20030H S1 UE40030H S1 UE75030H S1 Applicable Servomotor wattage 100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W Cable length between motor and driver 20 m max Weight approxi
233. nder compounded condi tions Note 3 The Servomotor cannot be used a misty atmosphere Note 4 The drip proofing specifications for non conforming models are special specifications cov ered by IP 44 Models with drip proof specifications provide drip proofing on Servomotors with oil seals 5 21 Specifications Chapter 5 5 2 2 Performance Specifications m 200 VAC Servomotors R88M R88M R88M R88M UE10030H S1 UE20030H S1 UE40030H S1 UE75030H S1 UE10030V S1 UE20030V S1 UE40030V S1 UE75030V S1 200 200 750 Rated torque see note Rated rotational speed vmn 940 Momentary maximum rota r min 500 4 500 4 500 4 500 tional speed maximum j096 91 3 82 7 10 torque see note ues gt 75 1195 390 72 9 Momentary maximum rated 316 current ratio Rated current see note 0 87 2 6 4 4 Momentary maximum cur Aus 2 8 8 0 13 9 rent see note Rotor inertia kgem 0 40 x 1075 5 1 91 x 1075 6 71 x 10 5 GD2 4 kgfecmes 0 41 x 107 1 95 x 10 4 6 85 x 10 4 Torque constant see note Nem A 0 408 5 0 533 0 590 kgfecm A 4 16 5 44 6 01 Induced voltage constant mV r min 14 0 18 6 20 6 see note Power rate see note me 28 4 84 6 85 1 Mechanical time constant 0 3 0 3 Winding 5 as 1 13 1 2 0 45 E 8 Etectial m hs 54 UEPO4V UEPO8V UEP12V UEP20V Note The values for torque and rotational speed characteristics are th
234. ne of the object as it is moved If you wait half a second before moving the mouse you will see the object itself being moved making it easier to position it in its new location The sign will appear on the hand after pressing the Ctrl Key indicating a copy operation rather than a move operation There are many ways to copy objects Ctrl D will duplicate the currently selected object Ctrl C will copy an object to clipboard Ctrl V will paste an object from clipboard These last two work in almost all windows programs so are well worth remembering You can also select Copy Paste or Duplicate from the Edit menu or by using the icons on the menu bar Copying objects also ensures that their dimensions are identical to each other creating a more visually appealing user interface Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Buttons continued Double Click on the new button In the Up Command edit box replace the 1 with 0 This will turn the digital tag Pump 1 Mode false to represent Auto mode Movement Y Input Access Up command yono Action gt Pump_1_Mode 0 xj Down Repeat Logging Log message spueuiuio Repeat rate 500 E milliseconds Clear Property Cancel Apply Help Click on the Appearance Tab to change the text label on the button Appearance Movement v Input Access
235. ng pages illustrate the cabling options for connecting Omron programmable controllers with computers Omron s HMIs hand held programmers high density I O modules and I O terminal blocks Hand held Programmers and CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 Peripheral Port CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 C200H CN222 2 m C200H CN422 4 m CQM1 PRO01 E C200H PRO27 E Reference Information Hand held Programmers and CQM1H Peripheral Port CS1W CN224 2 m CS1W CN624 6 m 4 1 lipa 1 T CQM1H PROO1 E C200H PRO27 E C200H CN222 2 m 200 422 4 m F l CQM1 PRO01 E C200H PRO27 E Reference Information Hand held Programmer and CPM2C Communication Port CS1W CN114 5 cm CQM1H PRO01 E CS1W CN224 2 m CS1W CN624 6 m CS1W KS001 E Key Sheet supplied with CQM1 PRO01 E
236. ng speed Check the following items Is the emergency stop operating correctly Are the limit switches operating correctly Is the operating direction of the machinery correct Are the operating sequences correct Are there any abnormal sounds or vibration Is anything abnormal occurring If anything abnormal occurs refer to Chapter 4 Application and apply the appropriate countermea sures 6 Operation Under Actual Load Conditions Operate the Servomotor in a regular pattern and check the following items Is the speed correct Use the speed display Is the load torque roughly equivalent to the measured value Use the torque command display Are the positioning points correct When an operation is repeated is there any discrepancy in positioning Are there any abnormal sounds or vibration Is either the Servomotor or the Servo Driver abnormally overheating Is anything abnormal occurring If anything abnormal occurs refer to Chapter 4 Application and apply the appropriate countermea sures 7 Readjust the gain f the gain could not be adjusted completely using auto tuning perform the procedure in 3 7 Making Adjustments to adjust the gain 3 19 Operation Chapter 3 3 6 2 Jog Operations Jog operations rotate the Servomotor in a forward or reverse direction using the Parameter Unit Jog operations are made possible when system check mode Cn 00 is setto 00 The items in parentheses in the following e
237. non USER S MANUAL OMNUC U MODELS R88M UE AC Servomotors MODELS R88D UEP AC Servo Drivers AC SERVOMOTORS DRIVERS 100 to 750 W Pulse train Inputs Thank you for choosing this OMNUC U series UE models product Proper use and handling of the product will ensure proper product performance lengthen product life and may prevent possible accidents Please readthis manualthoroughly and handle and operate the product with care General Instructions Refer to Precautions first and carefully read and be sure to understand the information provided Familiarize yourself with this manual and understand the functions and performance of the Servo motor and Servo Driver for proper use The Servomotor and Servo Driver must be wired and the Parameter Unit must be operated by ex perts in electrical engineering We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed Precautions on the dangers of high voltage equipment Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off These terminals are live even with the power turned off Do not perform withstand voltage or other megameter tests on the product Doing so may damage internal components Servomotors and Servo Drivers have a finite service life Be sure to keep replacement products on hand and to cons
238. o 12a 15 DM 6640 DM 6643 00a 03 Modo de Entrada del Contador de Alta Velocidad 1 Cuando comienza Entrada en Fase Diferencial 1x la operaci n Entrada en Fase Diferencial 2x Entrada en Fase Diferencial 4x Entrada en Pulso Adelante Atr s Entrada en Pulso y Direcci n 04 a 07 Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de Rango Num rico y M todo de Reset del Contador de Alta Velocidad 1 Referido a la siguiente tabla de m s abajo 08 a 11 Modo de Entrada del Contador de Alta Velocidad 2 Referido a la explicaci n dada m s arriba para el Contador 1 12a15 Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de Rango Num rico y M todo de Reset del Contador de Alta Velocidad 2 Referido a la siguiente tabla de m s abajo DM 6641 DM 6644 00a03 Modo de Entrada del Contador de Alta Velocidad 3 Referido a la explicaci n dada m s arriba para el Contador 1 04 a 07 Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de Rango Num rico M todo de Reset del Contador de Alta Velocidad 3 Referido a la siguiente tabla de m s abajo DM 6641 DM 6644 08a 11 Modo de Entrada del Contador de Alta Velocidad 4 Cuando comienza Referido a la explicaci n dada m s arriba para el la operaci n Contador 1 12a15 Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de Rango Num rico y M todo de Reset del Contador de Alta Velocidad 4 Referido a la siguiente tabla de m s abajo Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de Rango Num rico y M todo de Reset de los Contadores de Alta Velocidad Frecuencia de Cuenta Modo de
239. old the CTRL key down while double clicking the object Once you are satisfied with the position and shape of both pipes select both pipes by holding down the Ctrl Key and clicking on each pipe Release the Ctrl Key Click the Group button mi on the tool bar or select Group from the Arrange menu z Click the Send to Back button on the tool bar or select Sent to Back from the Arrange menu Double Click on either of the pipes that you have drawn You will notice that the configuration dialog displayed is for Group Properties rather than Pipe Properties All configurations you now perform will apply to all objects contained within the group in this case the two pipes Group Properties Click on the Fill Tab Insert Appearance Movement Scaling v Fil Input Slider Access Pump_1 _CMD tag into the ON color lt edit box Type ON color when P 4 On off Pump_1_CMD Se d C Multistate Sj Set the Off Color to light grey and the C array Color to Green Click C Threshold C Gradient Your configuration of the pipe work is now complete Save the page OFF color ON color 84 Clear Property Cancel Apply Help 52 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps amp Piping continued lt Citect Graphics Builder Tutorial MyPage FL Eile Edit View Objects Text Arrange Tools Window Help a 2814812153 85 80 88
240. olors nennen nennen 44 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Numbers l 46 Creating Graphics Pages 3D rectangles nennen nenne nnren nnns nnne et nnne tnnt eterne nnne nnns nnne 46 Creating Graphics Pages Pumps amp Piping eic tec tb e danse da ace adeb se 48 Creating Graphics Pages Managing True Colors nennen nnne enne trennen nnne tnn nnne nennen 53 Accessing Alarm and Trend Display 55 A terim eec seit mein usu te cete eu dfc donet retta terere 55 Contigurind Trends u uu XX 56 Gornfig fitig Security S S q a e reato u u aa 57 aida 59 RUNUM poe ua susu as mau ua 61 Runtime TEMS 64 Runtime Process AnalySt Rm 66 Administrative TOOlS uu uu 70 Administrative Tools Configuring the Menu u 71 Administrative Tools Tag Debug u tete e Hr eet i eee a ee id 74 Backing Up Your Projegt 75 Restorindg Your Pro Editar ex ua te ade t 76 TROUDICSHO OUNMO uu g T 78 Addendum Security Validation
241. on Encoder S phase was disconnected or short circuited OFF Momentary power fail ure alarm The power supply was re started within the power retention peri od ON Alarm reset power sup ply turned on This is history data only and is not an alarm Parameter Unit trans mission error 1 Data could not be transmitted after the power supply was turned on It no longer exists in the alarm history Parameter Unit trans mission error 2 Note means indefinite 4 2 2 Alarm Output Transmission timeout error It no longer exists in the alarm histo This section describes the timing of alarm outputs when power is turned when alarms occur The method used to clear alarms is also described 4 8 Application Chapter 4 m Timing Chart Power input Run command RUN Error occurrence 6 ms min Alarm reset 1 RESET Approx 2 s ON 9 6 ms Alarm output if ALM OFF H 25to35ms ADI S50 MS ON i Power to motor Alarm output ALMCOM Output specifications 30 VDC 50 mA max Normal Output transistor ON Error alarm Output transistor OFF m Clearing Alarms Any of the following methods can be used to clear alarms Turn ON the alarm reset signal RESET Toggle the power supply Press the Reset Key on the Parameter Unit Overcurrent alarms A 10 however cannot be cleared by togglin
242. on direction and the torque direction match it is shown as positive The regenerative energy for each section can be found by means of the following formulas 1 2 Ny Tp ty 1 027 x 1072 J Ego No Tio eto 1 027 x 1072 J Eos 1 2 N tg 1 027 x 1072 J 4 N Rotation speed at beginning of deceleration r min Tp1 Torque when declining kgf cm 2 Deceleration torque kgf cm ty tg Travel time equivalent to torque when declining s to Deceleration time s Note There is some loss due to winding resistance so the actual regenerative energy will be approxi mately 90 of the figure derived by the formula The maximum regenerative energy for the Servo Driver s internal capacitors only can be found by means of the following formula Eg is the larger of Egy Ego Egg When regenerative energy is absorbed at the Servo Driver only Eg must not exceed the amount of re generative energy that can be absorbed atthe Servo Driver In addition the average regenerative pow er when a Regeneration Unit is connected can be found by means of the following formula Egi Ego Eg3 T W T Operation cycle s Eg must not exceed the maximum regeneration absorption capacity of the Servo Driver when only the Servo Driver is used to absorb regenerative energy When a Regeneration Unit is connected the aver age regenerative power Pi must not exceed the regeneration proce
243. on is complete If the cover is left on during operation heat buildup may damage the Units Take measures during installation and operation to prevent foreign objects such as metal particles oil machining oil dust or water from getting inside of Servo Drivers m AC Servomotors e Operating Environment Be sure that the environment in which the Servomotor is operated meets the following conditions Ambient operating temperature 0 C to 40 C Ambient operating humidity 2096 to 8096 RH with no condensation Atmosphere No corrosive gases e Impact and Load The Servomotor is resistant to impacts of upto 10 G 98 m s Do not subject it to heavy impacts or loads during transport installation or positioning In addi tion do not hold onto the encoder cable or connec tor areas when transporting it Always use a pulley remover to remove pulleys couplings or other objects from the shaft Secure cables so that there is no impact or load placed on the cable connector areas e Connecting to Mechanical Systems The axial loads for Servomotors are specified in sec tion 5 2 3 If an axial load greater than that specified is applied to a Servomotor it will reduce the service life of the motor bearings and may damage the motor shaft When connecting to a load use couplings that can sufficiently absorb mechanical eccentricity and Motor shaft center line Shaft core variation displacement
244. or s momentary maximum torque decreases When the normal temperature of 20 and 10 C are compared the momentary maximum torque increases by approximately 496 Conversely when the magnet warms up to 80 from the normal temperature of 20 the momentary maximum torque decreases by approximately 896 Generally in a mechanical system when the temperature drops the friction torque increases and the load torque becomes larger For that reason overloading may occur at low temperatures In particu lar in systems which use deceleration devices the load torque at low temperatures may be nearly twicethe load torque at normal temperatures Check with a monitor using a torque command to see whether overloading is occurring at low temperatures and how much the load torque is Likewise check to see whether there abnormal Servomotor overheating or alarms are occurring at high tem peratures An increase in load friction torque increases the apparent load inertia Therefore even if the Servo Driver parameters are adjusted at a normal temperatures Check to see whether there temperature there may not be optimal operation at low is optimal operation at low temperatures too 5 2 4 Allowable Loads on Servomotor Shafts The allowable loads on Servomotor shafts are shown in the following table Operate the Servomotor at no more than the allowable radial and thrust loads Atthe time of assembly assemble the Servomotor at no more than t
245. orial V7 10 Quickstart Tutorial i ignoto lat 3 Definition Of TEMS er 4 Create a New Project Folder cnn nono n anna 6 Contig uring Clusters L S u S aa 7 Gonfigure an VO Device Cc LEES 11 Gonfiguring irritar hukun aa k 14 17 Creating Graphic Pages Creating a new page a 18 Creating Graphic Pages Saving your page L 19 Creating Graphics pages Setting up the Grid nnne nennen nennt rentes nn nnne nnne 20 Creating Graphics pages Configuring buttons nennen nennen nenne nnrnn nennt nennt nennen enne 21 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Symbol Sets nennen nennen nnne trennen nennt ener 27 Creating Graphics Pages Aligning Objects L 30 Creating Graphics Pages Formatting with Rectangles u 32 Testing Graphics Pages Computer Setup Wizard nennen nnne nens 35 Testing Graphics Pages RE ERES eu ERG ERR ee 38 Creating Graphics Pages Analog Indicators amp Controls u nennen 40 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Text nennen nnne ennt nnne trr nt nnse 44 Creating Graphics Pages Creating C
246. ows Go into settings mode MODE SET Key Display the pertinent parameter number Direction Keys Handy type Up and Down Keys Mounted type Display the contents data of the parameter DATA Key Change the data Direction Keys Handy type Up and Down Keys Mounted type Save the data in memory MODE SET and DATA Keys 3 5 1 Setting and Checking User Parameters Cn 04 to 26 m Displaying User Parameters Perform the following procedures on the Parameter Unit to display the user parameters e Displaying with Handy type R88A PRO2U 1 Press the MODE SET Key to go into settings mode cn 2 Press the Direction Keys to display the desired user parameter number Press the Right and Left Keys to select the digit to be set The digit whose value can be set will blink Press the Up and Down Keys to increment or decrement the digit 3 Press the DATA Key to display the setting of the specified parameter 4 Press the DATA Key again to return to the parameter number display Note If only the Up or Down Key is pressed at step 2 the parameter number can be set directly In this case the rightmost digit will blink The number cannot be set if the second digit the 10s digit is blinking i e blinking indicates the digit that can be changed 3 12 Operation Chapter 3 e Displaying with Mounted type R88A PR03U 1 Press the MODE SET Key to go
247. p switch S1 Limit switch 52 K1 and K2 NC K1 and K2 NO 1 and 2 1 2 51 Emergency stop switch with positive opening mechanism S2 Starter switch Magnet Contactor KM1 and 2 M 3 phase motor G9S OMRON G9S G9S 2002 WITH 2 CHANNEL AUTO RESET LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Timing Chart Limit switch S1 K1 and K2 NO K1 and K2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO 51 Limit switch S2 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanism D4D and D4B KM1 and 2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor G9S 301 24 VDC WITH 2 CHANNEL LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Feedback loop PC A OUT Timing Chart Limit switches 1 and 52 Starter switch 53 NC NO K1 K2 NC K1 and K2 NO KM1 and KM2 NC 1 and 2 PC output KM3 S1 Limit switch S2 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanism D4D and D4B S3 Starter switch KM1 and KM2 Magnet Contactor KM3 G3J Solid state Contactor M 3 phase motor omnon G9S G9S G9S 501 AC MODEL WITH 2 CHANNEL LIMIT SWITCH INPUT 23
248. p gain Cn 04 to 20 or less Match the gain with no load Confirm the initial display shown above Press the MODE SET Key to enter the settings mode Press the Up Key to specify user parameter Cn 04 Press the DATA Key to display the setting of Cn 04 Press the Down Key to change the setting to 20 oO 0c WN Press the DATA Key to record the new setting in memory 3 18 Operation Chapter 3 7 Press the DATA Key again to return to the parameter number display 2 Jog Operations See 3 6 2 Jog Operations Perform jog operations using the Parameter Unit and confirm the following Does the motor turn in the correct direction Is there any unusual sound or vibration Do any error occur If an error occurs refer to Chapter 4 Application for troubleshooting 8 Connect a load and auto tune See 3 7 Making Adjustments Connectthe motor shaftto the load mechanical system securely being sure to tighten screws so that they will not become loose Perform auto tuning with the Parameter Unit 4 Turning ON the Run command Input Turn ON the run command input The Servomotor will go into servo ON status Give a speed command or carry out the following check with a jogging operation 5 Low Speed Operation Operate at low speed Apply a low frequency pulse command The meaning of low speed can vary with the mechanical system Here low speed means approxi mately 1096 to 2096 of the actual operati
249. p integration 20 ms 210 10 000 Speed loop integration constant constant Brake timing i Cn 17 Torque command filter Setting for torque command fil time constant ter time constant 6 4 to Position loop gain 1b 4 398 Hz n Positioning completion 3 0 to 250 Sets the range for the position range ing completion signal output 4 1 0 1 6 110500 For position loop response ad justment Electronic gear ratio G1 1 to 65 535 Setting range numerator see note 2 0 01 G1 G2 100 Electronic gear ratio G2 denominator see note 2 Position command accel eration deceleration time constant Note 1 Cn 04 speed loop gain is factory set for three times the load inertia Therefore if the load inertia is extremely small some oscillation may occur If it does then lower Cn 04 to 20 or less Note 2 Afterthe settings for Cn 24 Electronic gear ratio G1 numerator and Cn 25 Electronic gear ratio G2 denominator have been made they become effective when the power is turned on again after having been cut off Check to see that the LED display has gone off 3 5 3 Electronic Gear 1 to 65 535 0 to 640 Sets the setting number for smoothing m Function The motor will be driven with a pulse determined by multiplying the command pulse count by the electronic gear ratio The electronic gear is useful for the following applications To fine tune the position and speed of two lines that must b
250. pectancy Curve 240 VAC 5 0 4 cos 1 o o gt o 1 G9S three pole five pole models Life expectancy x10 operations Contact current A Operation G9S 2001 WITH SINGLE CHANNEL MANUAL RESET EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH INPUT Timing Chart 51 RE 11 Feedback loop 1 alsa O f Emergency stop Switch S1 KM1 Limit switch 52 52 2 K1 and K2 NC 4 K1 2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO KM1 pe KM2 ie 51 Limit switch S2 Starter switch KM1 2 Magnet Contactor M 3 phase motor G9S omnon G9S G9S 2001 WITH SINGLE CHANNEL AUTO RESET LIMIT SWITCH INPUT Y Feedback loop 81 Control b 1 Circuit Timing Chart Limit switch S1 K1 and K2 NO K1 and K2 NO KM1 and KM2 NO KM1 and 2 NO S1 Safety Limit Switch with positive opening mechanism D4D and D4B Magnet Contactor KM1 and 2 M 3 phase motor G9S 2002 WITH 2 CHANNEL MANUAL RESET EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH INPUT Feedback loop Timing Chart Emergency sto
251. phase input Input impedance 220 9 18 Encoder B phase input Line driver input conforming to ElA RS422A 19 Encoder B phase input Input impedance 220 9 20 Shielded ground Cable shielded ground see note Note Pin 20 is not used on models conforming to EC Directives Instead connect the cable shield to the connector plug and ground it directly using a clamp e Connectors Used 20P Nippon Amp Sumitomo 3M 178239 2 10120 3000VE 10320 52A0 008 Receptacle at Servo Driver Soldered plug at cable side Case at cable side e Pin Arrangement Encoder power sup Encoder ply GND i i power sup 2 EOV GND 12 NC power sup Encoder GND Encoder power sup 4 ply 5 V Encoder 14 S 1 Encoder power sup ESV V 15 S S phase ESV power sup 16 A a ein diet A phase ply 5 V input Encoder gt N 17 Encoder input 8 NC 18 B B phase input Encoder FS 19 B 20 eae ground note Note Pin 20 is not used with models conforming to EC Directives e Encoder Pulse Input Signals S phase Inputs signals output from the Servomotor encoder In S phase servo sensor U V W and Z phase are transmitted according to A and B phase logic 5 17 Specifications C
252. pply ON Main circuit connector E OFF MUN T Class 3 ground f ee id MC to 100 9 or less pud 1M X Surge killer x JES ee PL Servo error display 1MC oj EE R88D CAU S C OMNUC U series UE model CAU B OMNUC U series UE model AC Servo Driver XB Power Cable AC Servomotor O O ag d R T24VDC See note r UO v Le EN CN1 M O 34AM w 2230 12 12t024VDC AA rd LLL 5 85 ALMCOM LO x Class 3 ground o to 100 Q or less 5 CN1 CN2 R88A CRU 5 Encoder Cable _ E 4 rud D 2 3 CN1 DON BKIR 7 0 R88A CPU s A 12to24 VDC General purpose OGND 10 Control Cable Note Use an independent power supply when using an electromagnetic brake 2 27 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m Connecting a Regeneration Unit Single phase 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz 88D UEP H Single phase 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 88D UEP L OMNUC U series R T AC Servo Driver O UE model 1MC GENS 010 5 rt 934 ALM 935 ALMCOM Mimo 12 to 24 VDC OFF pH ipi External Regenerative 1MC x i i Resistor O O O ON a 206 EU Short bar Regeneration Unit R88A RGO8UA Note 1 Disconnect the short bar from terminals RG and JP before connecting the External Regen erative Resistor Note 2 Connect the External Regenerative Resistor between terminals P and RG Note 3 The Regeneration Unit does not
253. puertos del CQM1H La tarjeta serie de comunicaciones permite aumentar el numero de puertos serie del sin necesidad de utilizar ningun slot de E S Permite programar Macros de Protocolo algo que no es posible realizar en los puertos de la CPU por tanto proporciona la posibilidad de conectar facilmente cualquier dispositivo de prop sito general que tenga un puerto serie adeta de comunteaci ones sarsa Loclor de Controlador c digo de dedicado E barras Controlador d tarmparalura Dispositivo externo con puarto Rza o Rodez Ado La tarjeta tiene ambos puertos RS 232C y RS 422A 485 El puerto RS422A 485 da la posibilidad de realizar conexiones 1 N con dispositivos de prop sito general sin necesidad de utilizar ningun conversor Las conexiones 1 N se pueden utilizar con Macros de Protocolo o con NT Link 1 N GR MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 25 7 5 41 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 7 2 Configuraci n del Sistema La Tarjeta Serie de Comunicaciones soporta los siguientes modos de comunicaci n e Host Link comunicaciones con un ordenador dispositivo de programaci n o Terminal Programable e Protocolo Libre comunicaciones sin protocolo TXD y RXD con dispositivos externos est ndar e Macro de Protocolo comunicaciones de acuerdo con las especificaciones de comunicaciones del dispositivo externo e PC Link 1 1 enlace 1 1 con un CQM1H u otro PLC de serie C e 1
254. r less Note 2 Afterthe settings Cn 24 Electronic gear ratio G1 numerator or Cn 25 Electronic gear ratio G2 denominator have been made they become effective when the power is turned on again after having been cut off Check to see that the LED display has gone off 6 10 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Setup Parameters No 1 Cn 01 Fact Explanatio BN Sequence input Servo turned ON or OFF by Run command exter signal switching nally input 1 Servo always ON Permits always forward drive oO Enables reverse drive prohibit input NOT 0 eue always reverse drive a used EE Emergency stop the motor using dynamic brake for selection vel Stops the motor using maximum torque for overtra vel 9 p f Posa Deviation Clears the counter when the servo shuts off or when counter with an error occur Servo OFF Does not clear the counter when the servo shuts off or when an error occur ES CT CECI Ne CEC Netused Note 1 Do not change the setting of bits 1 4 to 7 9 and b to F of setup parameter no 1 Cn 01 Note 2 These parameters become effective only after power is reset Confirm that the indicators go out before turning power back on Check to see that the LED display has gone off 6 11 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 m Setup Parameters No 2 Cn 02 Factory Explanation setting
255. r Zoom Out as required You can change the size of the zoom window by placing the cursor over one corner until the resize cursor is shown then hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse 32 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Aligning Objects continued Since the lights are in the correct position relative to each other we will select all the lights so that we can move them together as a group Place cursor above and to left of top button hold down left mouse button and move mouse then release mouse button to lasso all three buttons If you have the Grid tool turned on press F8 to disable the Snap to Grid function otherwise the buttons will only move to the nearest grid position You can now precisely position the lights by placing the cursor over the selected objects make sure the hand cursor appears then press Enter or hold down left mouse button next use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the buttons one pixel at a time in the direction that you want Use the zoom box to see exactly where the objects are positioned to the nearest pixel Press enter again to set the position or release left mouse button if you used that method Save your page Creating Graphics Pages Formatting with Rectangles Next we will create a grey background to highlight our control panel Press F8 to turn the Snap to Grid selection back on On the Toolbox click tne Rectangle Tool Click and drag to place
256. r computer setup is complete Press the Finish button to save your settings and exit or press the Cancel button to quit without saving any changes lt Back Cancel Help Check Server and Display Client then click Next Make sure you left the Multi Process box unchecked Change the networking selection from the default of Discovery to No Networking and then click Next This will isolate this CitectSCADA on the network to allow it to run as a Stand alone system Click Finish We are now ready to run our project and test our controls 37 Multi Processing is used to distribute server tasks across multiple CPUs and cannot be used without a license key Networking enables communications from this CitectSCADA node to other CitectSCADA nodes on the network It cannot be used without a license key 38 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Testing Graphics Pages Runtime Press the Run button The Runtime Manager dialog will appear showing the startup process status Runtime Manager 7 10 232 CPU ProcessID Process Status Message 9 1856 Cher My Slalrg Irsbakerg 1 0 S Cancel If you have not inserted protection key you will see the following message Error protection key found amp Press OK to run in Demo Mode Cancel Click OK to run the project in demonstration mode The default startup page contains a number of menu items which can be
257. r rotation detected Cd Symbol Displays Base block fl In operation running p Forward rotation prohibited n Reverse rotation prohibited d Alarm display SES Jog operation page 3 20 Settings mode C n System check mode Clear alarm history data page 4 11 Motor parameters check page 4 7 Co Auto tuning page 3 21 Setup u Sequence input signal switch page 3 10 1 parameter Abnormal stop selection x no 1 Deviation counter with Servo OFF pata Reverse mode page 3 11 Command pulse mode Deviation counter clear Torque command filter time constant Monitor output level switch Setup con 0 2 parameter no 2 User parameters C N 4 Speed loop gain page 3 14 cn 2 6 Position command acceleration deceleration time constant Y Monitor mode Speed feedback page 4 5 Torque command Number of pulses from U phase edge Electrical angle Internal status bit display 1 Internal status bit display 2 Command pulse speed display Position deviation deviation counter Input pulse counter EL OX LI ee 2 are Mie a a D CO C C5 c5 c5 c5 c5 c WO OO HI C Un OO gt Y
258. r the custom RS 232 cable Connects to Omron NT Connects to AB 1761 Cable a 1 1 DCD TXD 2 2 RXD EL gH o e AB 1761 CBL PM02 a 4 DTR Series 5 5 GROUND 6 _ 6 DSR 7 7 RTS 8 2 8 CTS GROUND 9 9 RI 9 Pin Male 9 Pin Male DB9 Connector DB9 Connector AB MicroLogix 1200 Communication Cables 1761 CBL PMO2 Series C DB9 to 8 pin mini din connector order from AB Allen Bradley SLC 5 02 Communicates via AB s DF1 protocol This PLC comes with only a DH 485 port The Allen Bradley 1747 KE module must be purchased to provide a serial connection on the SLC 5 02 Connect the communication cable from the NT to the serial port on the 1747 KE module AB SLC 5 02 1747 KE 1747 C13 I NT31 Port A Laa NT631 Port or B Allen Bradley SLC 5 00 5 01 5 02 This cable can only be used in 1 1 connection with DH485 port AB SLC 5 00 5 01 5 02 NT31 Port B NT31 Port A l NT631 Port A or B NT631C CN221 485 NT31 Port A AB SLC 5 02 Communication Cables and Accessories NT31C CN321 EU 3 0 m cable 25 to 9 pin NT to AB SLC PLC NT631C CN321 EU 3 0 m cable 9 to 9 pin NT to AB SLC PLC 1747 KE DB9 Serial Port Module order from AB 1747 613 DH 485 module connection cable V0
259. range pink red yellow El Help Repeat this exercise for the ON symbol state this time selecting the cyan light from the lights round library Click OK when your configuration of the manual symbol is complete Symbol Set Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fil Input Slider Access lt symbol when On off Pump 1 Mode 1 x 3 C Multi state ES C Array C Animated z OFF symbol ON symbol Set Set 9 Clear 9 Cle grey cyan Clear Property DK Ne Cancel Apply Help Copy the Symbol Set and place the new one next to the Auto button Again don t worry about positioning the symbol perfectly as we will align the various objects shortly Double Click the copied symbol to access its animation properties In the ON symbol when edit box replace the expression with Pump_1_Mode 0 then click OK 28 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Symbol Sets continued Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Slider lt lt Access Type ON symbol when On off Pump 1 Mode 0 xj C Multi state C Array C Animated OFF symbol ON symbol Set Set 9 Clear Clear grey cyan Clear Property A was Cancel Apply Help Make a third copy of the symbol set and position it next to the On Off button In the On symbol when edit box replace the text with P
260. rding to the operating conditions Chapter 3 section 3 5 Trial Operation Checkto see whether protective functions such as emergency stop and operational limits are work ing reliably Check operation at both low speed and high speed Chapter 3 section 3 6 Adjustments Execute auto tuning Manually adjust the gain as required Chapter 3 section 3 7 Operation Operation can now begin If any trouble should occur refer to Chapter 4 Applications Chapter 4 3 3 Operation Chapter 3 3 2 Turning On Power and Checking Displays 3 2 1 Items to Check Before Turning On Power m Checking Power Supply Voltage Check to be sure that the power supply voltage is within the ranges shown below R88D UEP H 200 VAC specifications Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V 50 60 Hz R88D UEP L 100 VAC specifications Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 V 50 60 Hz R88D UEPL I V 200 VAC specifications Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V 50 60 Hz R88D UEPLILIW 100 VAC specifications Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 V 50 60 Hz m Checking Terminal Block Wiring The power supply input R and T phases must be properly connected to the terminal block The Servomotor s red U white V and blue W power lines and the green ground wire must be properly connected to the terminal block m Checking the Servomotor There should be no load on the Servomotor Do not connec
261. rending and Reporting roles From the Servers menu select each of the server tasks in turn and configure them as shown below File Edit Tags Alarms System Communication Servers Tools Window Help 1112151 EEES B ce Clusters Network Addresses Alarm Servers Report Servers Trend Servers VO Servers Use the pull down lists where provided to minimise the chance of mistakes Cluster Name MyCluster MyAlarmServer Es Primary Network Addresses MyAddress J Port ly Cluster Server Name Comment Alarms will run on the MyAddress P Record 1 TIP Network Addresses define which computers are available on the network to operate as Citect Servers We can identify these computers by TCP IP address or computer name The universal loopback address 127 0 0 1 is only appropriate for standalone Systems with no clients For networked or redundant Systems refer to the online help for details on how to configure additional Network Addresses and use them in your Server definitions Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Clusters continued gt This identifies the Alarm Server process to run on the computer with MyAddress TCP IP address within the MyCluster server group in the Primary mode The Server Name MyServer will be used by networked clients to connect to this server to acquire the alarm information for display purposes Continue for Repor
262. rial Black Italic 9 3 lt Batang 3 Bold 10 E BatangChe Bold Italic 11 B Style Browallia New 12 a Custom Fill Color BrowalliaUPC 14 Calibri 16 Fill Color Up 5 Alignment Effects r Text Fill Color Dowr Left Strikeout Manual E OE C Right Underline C Centre z L Foreground Cancel Apply Help Click on the Input tab at the top of the form to configure the action the button will perform Click on the Insert button Click on Insert Tag option Appearance Movement Y Input Access Action gt Down sert Tag Repeat Insert Fun m Logging Log message Up command spueuiuo pago Repeat rate 500 milliseconds zi Clear Property Cancel Apply Help In the Insert Tag Dialog Double Click on Pump 1 Mode Pump 1 Speed Pump_1_Mode If you don t see the expected property sheet as you go through these exercises then you may need to locate the correct sheet by looking at the screens on the page then click on the horizontal amp vertical tabs to find the right sheet Horizontal Tabs Aapomaree 4 veu gt Acces pano uem Vertical Tabs TIP Tabs with ticks on them indicate that configuration exists on that tab 23 Quickstart Tutorial 7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Buttons continued P
263. ring the rectangle s appearance click on the 11 tab and select Level from the vertical tabs on the right hand side of the form Use the Insert button to insert the tag Pump 1 Speed Change the Background Color to black then click OK Rectangle Properties Appearance Movement Scaling v Fil Input Slider Access Level expression Pump 1 Speed Specify range linimum O Level At 0 percent minimum t At 100 ercent maximum E P laag 20100 Y Fill direction Background color j Clear Property DK Cancel Apply Help This rectangle will fill change color as the pump speed increases The range for the analogue value 0 to 500 RPM is automatically derived from its tag definition that we built earlier Next we will create a slider to allow operator control of the pump speed when itis in manual mode 42 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Analog Indicators amp Controls continued You will need to know the how far in pixels the slider needs to move To find this out select the gradient rectangle bounding boxes will appear and look at information provided in the status bar at the bottom right corner of the Graphics Builder This status bar will show you the width and height of the selected object Write down the height of the rectangle 34x122 326 387 GUIDE GRID NOTE If the
264. river and Regeneration Unit be inspected at five year intervals if they are used under conditions worse than the above or not used over a long time of time Contact your OMRON representative for inspection and the necessity of any component replacement 4 17 Im Chapter 5 Specifications 5 1 Servo Driver Specifications 5 2 Servomotor Specifications 5 3 Cable Specifications 5 4 Parameter Unit Specifications 5 5 Regeneration Unit Specifications 5 6 Front mounting Bracket Specifications Specifications Chapter 5 5 1 Servo Driver Specifications 5 1 1 General Specifications 2 Specficatins O O O O Operating ambient temperature 0 to 50 C Operating ambient humidity 3596 to 85 RH with no condensation Storage ambient temperature 10 C to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH with no condensation Storage and operating atmo No corrosive gasses sphere Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz in X Y and Z directions with 0 10 mm double amplitude acceleration 4 9 m s 0 5 G max time coefficient 8 min 4 sweeps Impact resistance Acceleration 19 6 m s 2 G max in X Y and Z directions three times Insulation resistance Between power line terminals and case 5 MQ min at 1 000 VDC Dielectric strength Non conforming Models Between power line terminals and case 1 000 VAC for 1 min 20 mA max at 50 60 Hz Models Conforming to EC Directives Betwee
265. rminal Block Appearance Position control Applicable servo driver Cable length Part number terminal block XW2B 20J6 1B R88D UP XW2Z 100J B1 XW2B 40J6 2B See note 2m 6 XW2Z 200J B1 XW2B 20J6 3B Note Two cables will be required on the Servo Driver side if the XW2B 40J6 2B Terminal Block is used for two axis control Cables Between PLC Position Control Module and Terminal Block Appearance Position control Applicable position Cable length Part number terminal block control module XW2B 20J6 1B C200H NC112 for one axis 0 5 m 1 64 ft XW2Z 050J A1 1 m 3 28 ft XW2Z 100J A1 XW2B 40J6 2B C200H NC211 for two axes 0 5 m 1 64 ft XW2Z 050J A2 m 3 28 ft XW2Z 100J A2 XW2B 20J6 3B CQM1 CPU43 EV1 for one or 0 5 m 1 64 ft XW2Z 050J A3 See note 1 two axes m 3 28 ft XW2Z 100J A3 XW2B 20J6 1B C200H NC113 for one axis 0 5 m 1 64 ft XW2Z 050J A6 m 3 28 ft XW2Z 100J A6 XW2B 40J6 2B C200HW NC213 for two axes 0 5 m 1 64 ft XW2Z 050J A7 See note 2 C200HW NC413 for four axes m 3 28 ft XW2Z 100J A7 Note 1 Two cables each will be required on the Servo Terminal Block and Position Control Module side and on the Servo Driver side if the CQM1 CPU43 is used for two axes 2 Two cables each will be required on the Servo Terminal Block and Position Control Module side and on the Servo Driver side if the 20 413 four axes is used for
266. rops Note 4 The Regeneration Unit does not conform to EC Directives 5 39 Specifications Chapter 5 5 6 Front mounting Bracket Specifications Front surface Mounting Brackets R88A TKO1U TKO2U are used to mount a Ser vo Driver from the front surface The model of the Bracket depends on the model of the Servo Driver These Mounting Brackets cannot be used with models conforming to EC Directives m Combinations Front surface Mounting Bracket Mode Supply voltage n R88D UEP04H 200 V 100 W R88A TKO1U R88D UEPOBH UEPO8H 20W TS UEP12H dow UEP20H 100 V 100 W R88A TKO1U zow Note The Brackets come with a top bracket a bottom bracket and five mounting screws m Dimensions e R88A TKO1U Top Mounting Bracket Two 3 6 dia pan head screws 2 B P 5 40 Specifications Chapter 5 Bottom Mounting Bracket Two 3 6 dia pan head screws e R88A TK02U Top Mounting Bracket 66 9 6 dia tb e ta 5 41 Specifications Chapter 5 Bottom Mounting Bracket m Mounting Dimensions e R88A TK01U e R88A TK02U 15 180 1 a lt D Two M5 30 Three M5 5 42 l Chapter 6 Supplementary Materials 6 1 Connection Examples 6 2 OMNUC U Series Standard Models 6 3 Parameter Setting Forms Supplementar
267. rred during operation Probable cause The power supply voltage is outside of the allowable range The load inertia is too large The power supply voltage is outside of the allowable range Regeneration Unit error Gravity torque is too large The rotational speed ex ceeded 4 950 r min due to overshooting Encoder is wired incorrectly Operating at more than 120 of the rated torque Chapter 4 Countermeasures The supply voltage must be 170 to 253 VAC when 200 VAC is specified The supply voltage must be 85 to 127 VAC when 100 VAC is specified Lengthen the deceleration time Reset the motor The supply voltage must be 170 to 253 VAC when 200 VAC is specified The supply voltage must be 85 to 127 VAC when 100 VAC is specified Replace the Regeneration Unit Add a counterbalance to the machine and reduce the gravity torque Reduce the lowering speed Connect a Regeneration Unit Adjust the gain Lower the maximum speed of the command Correct the wiring f the Servomotor shaft is locked unlock it f Servomotor power lines are incorrectly wired cor rect them Lighten the load Lengthen the acceleration time Adjust the gain Power supply voltage dropped The supply voltage must be 170 to 253 VAC when 200 VAC is specified The supply voltage must be 85 to 127 VAC when 100 VAC is specified Overload Runaway de
268. rty Cancel Apply Help Now is a good time for a regular page save Click the save icon You can compile and run the project again to test these changes before continuing to the next chapter If CitectSCADA is still running from your previous test you will need to compile and change pages before updates are picked up by the running system Advanced exercise If you re feeling adventurous you can add a disable function to the slider just like for the on off button under the Access tab 44 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Configuring Text We will now place some static text above the buttons to label the controls Click on the letter A on the Toolbox Type Pump 1 Note If you do not see the letters that you type it is most likely because the currently selected color is the same as the background color of the page Place the cursor above the buttons and click to position the text that you have typed An appearance form will be displayed to allow further customization of the text Select Bold font size 22 point and change the Foreground color to orange Click OK Text Properties Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Slider Access o 2 m a Ed 2 2 Alignment Effects 2 lt Left Strikeout H C Right Underline F Centre z Foreground Cancel Help
269. ry or otherwise handle the Servomotor by its cable otherwise the cable may become dis connected or the cable clamp may become damaged Take measures to prevent the shaft from rusting The shafts are coated with anti rust oil when shipped but anti rust oil or grease should also be applied when connecting the shaft to a load Absolutely do not remove the encoder cover or take the motor apart The magnet and the encoder are aligned in the Servomotor If they become misaligned the motor will not operate 2 17 System Design Installation Chapter 2 2 2 Wiring Non conforming Products 2 2 1 Connecting OMRON Servo Controllers Use general purpose control cables purchased separately to connect U series UE model AC Servomotors and Servo Drivers to OMRON Servo Controllers m Connecting SYSMAC C series Position Control Units Position Control Units for SYSMAC C series Programmable Controllers 3G2A5 NC111 EV1 C200H NC112 C200H NC211 SYSMAC C series Programmable Controller General purpose Control Cable R88A CPU s OMNUC U series UE model AC Servo Driver Power Cable R88A CAU R88A CAU Uo Encoder Cable R88A CRU OMNUC U series UE model AC Servomotor Note Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications for connector and cable specifications 2 18 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 2 2 2 Connector Terminal Conversion Unit The
270. s deviation counter overflow Note The input pulse width must meet the following conditions H Ti Tig 2 5 us TiL Specifications Chapter 5 m 100 VAC Input Servo Models R88D UEPIZL Continuous output current 0 P 3 1 A 3 8 A 4 8 A Momentary max output current 10 12 1 0 PWM frequency Cable length between motor and 20 m max driver Weight approximate Approx 0 9 kg Approx 1 2 kg Approx 1 5 kg Capacity Max pulse frequency 200 kpps Position loop gain 1 to 500 1 5 Electronic gear Electronic gear ratio setting range 0 01 G1 G2 100 G1 G2 1 to 65 535 Positioning completed 0 to 250 command units range Position acceleration de 0 to 64 0 ms The same setting is used for acceleration and deceleration celeration time constant Position command pulse TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V input see note Feed pulse and direction signal forward pulse and reverse pulse or 90 differen tial phase A and B phases signal set via parameter Pulse width See note Deviation counter reset TTL line driver input with photoisolation input current 6 mA at 3 V Sequence input 24 VDC 5 mA photocoupler input external power supply 12 to 24 VDC 30 mA min Position feedback output Z phase open collector output 30 VDC 20 mA 1 pulse revolution OFF on Z phase detection
271. s 3 None Depth 1 3 C Shadowed 7 Raised Highlight color 4 Lowered 2 2 Lowlight color Em rectangles and ovals amas Cancel Help Select Lowered from the various 3D Effects available and retain the default depth and color options then click OK 34 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Formatting with Rectangles continued The rectangle should now cover all of your buttons and lights obscuring them from view We need to send the rectangle to the back layer to allow the buttons and lights to appear in front of it Select the rectangle by clicking on it then click the Send to Back button alternatively select Arrange then Send to Back from the menu bar Builder Tutorial MyPage es El File Edit View Objects Text Arrange Tools Window Help 3 e P ula m CSY_Display_Title oxo 4 606 218 GUIDE GRID Your page should now look similar to the above Save your page 35 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Testing Graphics Pages Computer Setup Wizard It s time to test your configuration and see how your page looks and feels to an operator Firstly however we need compile the project to make sure we have not made any configuration errors and then we will run the CitectSCADA Computer Setup Wizard to configure how you want t
272. s subject to dust dirt chloride or iron powder Locations subject to splashes of water oil chemicals or other liquids Locations subject to direct vibration or shock Do not touch the Inverter radiator Regeneration Unit or Servomotor while power is being supplied or for a while after the power is turned off Doing so may result in a burn injury Storage and Transportation Precautions N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not carry the Servomotor by the cable or shaft ofthe Servomotor Doing so may result in an injury or Servomotor malfunction Do not pile up the products excessively Doing so may result in an injury or product malfunction Use motor eye bolts only for transporting the Servomotor Do not use them for trans porting the machines Doing so may result in an injury or machine malfunction Installation and Wiring Precautions N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not stand on the product or put heavy objects on the product Doing so may result in an injury Make sure that the product is well ventilated and the interior of the product is free of foreign matter Not doing so may result in a fire Mount the product properly Not doing so may result in a product malfunction Keep the specified distance between the Servo Driver and the interior surface of the control panel or any other machine Not doing so
273. s tool tips to describe each pen at that location m History mode Allows you to quickly and easily access historical data Zoom in out Allows you to quickly and easily zoom the trend graph by highlighting an area and pressing the zoom button m Scaling Allows you to change the minimum and maximum ranges for each pen Export Allows you to export raw time stamped data to the clipboard or a file 64 gt Trend Groups configuration can also be accessed from the Admin Tools option under the Tools menu 65 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime Trends continued Take some time to get used to these features as they are key components to assisting you in analyzing and interpreting your production information 19 Trend Jen e Pages Trends Alarms Tools kernel Q 0 BE 6 EP Be mS 93 0 122944 AM gt Em 12 37 14 AM Dct 22 2008 Pump_1 d Display history mode ESO n Det 22 2008 Current Value 66 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime Process Analyst CitectSCADA has facility for viewing trends and alarms The Process Analyst is an ActiveX object that can be embedded on your own page or you can use the default page provided Click on the Process Analyst button to display this page Initially this is an empty container ready to be configured Click on the Add Pens Z button s 7 Add New Pen s ES Define search Tren
274. se train Inputs specication Moa Pulse train inputs 200 VAC i VAG e Parameter Units Specification Handy type R88A PR02U Mounted type R88A PR03U e Encoder Cables wamaq Connectors at both ends R88A CRUD015C R88A CRUD020C Cable only R88A CRU001 6 9 Supplementary Materials Chapter 6 e Power Cables Cables Only Specification For standard motor no brake 1 units R88A CAU001 For motor with brake 1 m units R88A CAUO1B e General purpose Control Cables ss Specification For general purpose controller 1 m R88A connector at one end 2m R88A CPU002S 6 3 Parameter Setting Forms User Parameters Parameter name Factory Unit Setting setting range Speed loop gain see note 1 80 Hz 1 to 2 000 Speed loop integration constant 20 ms 2 to 10 000 1 timing 0 10 ms 01050 Torque command filter time constant 100 us 010250 iii Position loop gain 1 s 1 to 500 Positioning completion range Command 010250 Electronic gear ratio G1 numerator 1 to 65 535 see note 2 Electronic gear ratio G2 denominator 1 to 65 535 see note 2 Position command acceleration decel j 0 to 640 eration time constant Note 1 Cn 04 speed loop gain is factory set for three times the load inertia Therefore if the load inertia is extremely small some oscillation may occur If it does then lower Cn 04 to 20 o
275. sk bar as shown below s rrrF ne 7 rs Citect Project Editor xamp x Citect Graphics Bul To make sure that you have selected the correct icon you can let the mouse hang over the icon for about 2 seconds and a tool tip will appear to guide you Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Create a New Project Folder Run the Citect Explorer Click on Start Click Programs Click Citect Click CitectSCADA 7 10 Click CitectSCADA Explorer On the Tool Bar click on the New Project icon File View Tools Help CSV_Example m x CSV Example 28 Example Computer csv example example Setup Creates a new project In the New Project Dialog Box type Tutorial in the Name field to give the new project a name give ita description then click OK New Project Tutorial Description Citect tutorial project Location Cu ProgramDatalCitectiCitect Browse Page defaults Template style XP Style M Template resolution XGA y r Background color MN gt OK Cancel Help As you through this tutorial you might like to click on the Help button located on many of the dialogs as this will show you some of the other options available to you that are not covered by this tutorial Project Folders store all of the CitectSCADA files for your project including graphic pages tag definitions code etc Clicking on a different project in Ci
276. ssing power of the Regeneration Unit 3 29 Operation Chapter 3 Connect an external regeneration resistor when the regeneration processing power of the Regenera tion Unit 12 W is exceeded Refer to 3 8 3 Absorption of Regenerative Energy with the External Re generation Resistor for details on external regeneration resistors 3 8 2 Servo Driver Absorbable Regenerative Energy m Regenerative Energy Absorbed Internally The Servo Driver absorbs regenerative energy by means of an internal capacitor If there is more regen erative energy than can be absorbed by the capacitor an overvoltage error will be generated and opera tion cannot continue The amounts of regenerative energy that can be absorbed by the various Servo Drivers alone are shown in the tables below If regenerative energy exceeding these values is pro duced take the following measures e Connect a Regeneration Unit R88A RGO8UA Non conforming Models Lower the operating rotation speed The regenerative energy is proportional to the square of the rotation speed Lengthen the deceleration time Reduce the amount of regenerative energy per unit time When using multiple axes the terminals can be connected together and the terminals can be connected together to use regenerative energy as the drive energy for the other axes Models Con forming to EC Directives e 200 VAC Input Type Absorptive regen Maximum applicable Remarks see note 3 eration energy
277. st four digits 16 bits of information are displayed In the rightmost digit the bit number that can be set is displayed It can be checked whether the bit information is 0 not lit or 1 lit according to the 7 segment display vertical bar To change the set value first set the bit number in the rightmost digit and then set the appropriate bit to 0 or 1 m Setting Setup Parameters First display the setting of the setup parameter No 1 or No 2 using the procedure given above To change a setting specify the bit to be changed and then set it to 1 or 0 e Making Settings with Hand held Parameter Unit R88A PRO2U 1 Use the Right and Left Keys to display in the rightmost digit the bit number that is to be set 2 Using the Up or Down Key reverse the lit not lit status of the appropriate bit number For lit set the bit number to 1 For not lit set it to 0 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above as required 4 Save the data in memory by pressing the MODE SET Key or the DATA Key 5 With this the parameter setting operation is complete Pressing the DATA Key atthis point will bring back the parameter number display e Making Settings with Mounted Parameter Unit R88A PROS3U 1 Use the Up and Down Keys to display in the rightmost digit the bit number that is to be set 2 Using the MODE SET Key reverse the lit not lit status ofthe appropriate bit numb
278. stop the Servomotor when the RUN signal is OFF alarm output is ON or power is turned off The Servomotor will be in servo free condition with the dynamic brake ON after the Servomotor stops rotating 3 17 Operation Chapter 3 3 6 Trial Operation After the wiring is complete and the parameter settings have been made conduct a trial operation First check with rotation of the motor without connecting a load i e without connecting the mechanical system Then connect the mechanical system auto tune the system and confirm that the correct operation pattern is performed 3 6 1 Preparations for Trial Operation m Preparations e Power Off The power supply must be toggled to apply some of the parameter settings Always turn off the power supply before starting e No Motor Load Do not connect a load to the motor shaft during trial operation just in case the motor runs out of control e Stopping the Motor Make sure that the power switch can be turned off or the Run command used to stop the motor immedi ately in case of trouble e Connecting a Parameter Unit Connect a Parameter Unit to the CN3 connector on the front of the Servo Driver if one is not already connected m Actual Trial Operation 1 Powering Up With the run command RUN OFF apply an AC voltage After internal initialization the mode will be the status display mode Display example D D Set the speed loo
279. t er overflow a 10 Overcurrent Overheating 4 14 Occurred during operation Occurred even though pow er was on If reset is executed after waiting for a time operation resumes Occurred when Servomotor did not operate even when command pulse train was input Occurred at high speed op eration Occurred when a long com mand pulse was given The ambient temperature for the Servo Driver is high er than 50 Bring the ambient tempera ture for the Servo Driver down to 50 C or lower The load torque is too high Servomotor power lines or encoder lines are wired in correctly The Servomotor is mechani cally locked Servomotor power lines or encoder lines are wired in correctly The gain adjustment is insufficient The acceleration decelera tion times are too extreme The load is too large Lighten the load Lengthen the acceleration time Select another Servomo tor Correct the wiring Unlock the Servomotor shaft Correct the wiring Adjust the gain Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time Lighten the load Select another Servomo tor Application Alarm Error content display Overvoltage Over speed Condition when error oc curred Occurred when power was turned on Occurred during Servomo tor deceleration Occurred while lowering vertical shaft High speed rotation oc curred when command was input Occu
280. t Trend and IO Servers as shown below The Tutorial project defines a single PC inside of a single cluster and due to the loopback TCPIP address is incapable of communicating to other CitectSCADA nodes p a Leo or clients Cluster Name MyCluster 3 Server Name MyReportServer E Pimay Refer to the online help for Network Addresses MyAddress Port details Primary Comment Reports will run on MyAddress PC in cluster J u Standby server functions and Clustering options for mmm networked systems Record 1 a Cluster Name MyCluster 3 Server Name MyTrendServer I Primary d Network Addresses MyAddress ort Comment Trends will run on MyAddress PC in Replace Delete Help Record 1 Record added Cluster Name MyCluster 3 Server Name MyIOServer T m b El Network Addresses MyAddress Pot Port Comment Communications will be serviced by MyAddress PC Replace Delete Help Record 1 Record added We have now completed our Server setup and are ready to define our communications path to the PLC Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configure an I O Device Use Alt Tab to return to the Citect Explorer Make sure the Tutorial project is selected in the project list on the left hand side and that the Communications folder is open Double click on Express I O Device Setup sl Tutorial Citect Explorer File Vi
281. t for efficient and convenient operation of the product OMRON 1997 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval sys tem or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no re sponsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication General Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the OMNUC Servomotor and Servo Driver This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to describe the components of the product in detail Make sure that these protective covers are on the product before use Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Servo Driver Doing so may result in
282. t to the mechanical system The power line connectors at the Servomotor must be securely connected m Checking the Encoder Connectors The encoder connectors CN2 at the Servo Driver must be securely connected The encoder connectors at the Servomotor must be securely connected m Checking the Control Connectors The control connectors must be securely connected The Run command must be OFF m Checking the Parameter Unit Connection Parameter Unit R88A PRO2U or R88A PRO3U must be securely connected to connector CN3 3 2 2 Turning On Power and Confirming the Display m Turning On Power Confirm that it is safe to turn on the power supply and then turn on the power supply 3 4 Operation Chapter 3 m Checking Displays When the power is turned on one of the codes shown below will be displayed Normal Base block Error Alarm Display E 1012 Note 1 Base block means that the Servomotor is not receiving power Note 2 The alarm code the number shown in the alarm display changes depending on the contents of the error If the display is normal i e no errors use it as a monitor mode speed display Manually turn the Servomotor shaft clockwise and counterclockwise and check to be sure that it agrees with the posi tive and negative on the speed display If it does not agree then the encoder signal line may be wired incorrectly
283. tect Explorer immediately changes the project you are working in You can combine multiple configuration projects into a single runtime project using the project include feature described in the online help Tip Consider using the Quickstart Project as this can save you a lot of time Use the Example project to get ideas and learn how things are made by pulling them apart Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Configuring Clusters Clusters define where server processes communications data logging alarming etc are run and how different server processes interact with each other for redundancy purposes refer to the online help for more details Every CitectSCADA system must have at least one cluster defined with related Network Addresses and Server roles also defined Expand your project tree on the left hand side of Citect Explorer and select Communications Then double click on Clusters File View Tools Help Tutorial y al al Project List Ej My Projects A CSV Example EJES Contents of Communications 9 amp a Example Express I O I O Servers Alarm Trend Servers Report Network Boards 5 43 Tutorial Device Setup Servers Servers Addresses Graphics 4 E amp Tags E emt dh Alarms Ports Modems 0 Devices yo 03 System Remapping Communicatiogs 5 Cicode Files i CitectVBA Files If the Project Editor does not appear t
284. ters are the Servomotor specifications that can be controlled by that Servo Driver They are not the specifications of the Servomotor that is connected Use this to check whether the Servo Driver and Servomotor combination is suitable 4 6 Application Chapter 4 m Servomotor Parameter Checking Operation The items parentheses in the following explanation indicate operations using the Handy type Param eter Unit 1 2 M 4 chin 0910 90 10 01 4 cr EE s 6 eS 0 0 0 gt O oc Oo N m Parameter Display Contents Servomotor Parameters Press the MODE SET Key to switch to the settings mode Using the Up and Down Keys set parameter number 00 System check mode Press the DATA Key to display the setting of Cn 00 Using the Up and Down Keys change the setting to 04 Servomotor parameter check Press the MODE SET Key and check the Servomotor parameters in order Press the MODE SET Key to display special specifications in hexadecimal Press the MODE SET Key to return to the data display for the system check mode f e Special Specifications Motor capacity 01 100 W 02 200W Motor type 03 300W 04 200 V
285. the alarm icons at the bottom left of each page However to make these pages useful we must first define some alarms and trends in the project Configuring Alarms Switch to Citect Project Editor click on the d icon or use Alt Tab keys In the Project Editor Menu click on Alarms then click on Digital Alarms amp Citect Project Editor Tutorial UNCOMPILED File Edit Tags System Communication Servers Tools Window Help al Bl E Digital Alarms ese el Time Stamped Alarms TS wau Analog Alarms Advanced Alarms Multi Digital Alarms Time Stamped Digital Alarms Time Stamped Analog Alarms Alarm Categories Fill in the Digital Alarms form for a single alarm as shown below Remember it is better to use the drop downs to ensure data is entered correctly When the form is complete click Add Remember that pressing Enter will add another record to your alarm list so make sure the form is complete first or use the Add button Configuring Alarms continued Os 56 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Alarm Tag Pump_1_Mode Cluster Name MyCluster Y Alarm Name Pump 1 I gt Changed to manual mode Alarm Desc Pump_1_Mode 1 Delay Pump 1 mode Record 1 variable Tag Variable Tag B Category Comment Click on the icon to close the Digital Alarms form when you are finished Configuring Trends Now we need to config
286. ting internal status via indicators Power supply ON display base block positioning completion and rotation detection command pulse input Symbol display indicating internal status via 3 digit 7 segment display Base block operating forward rotation prohibited reverse rotation prohibited alarm display System check Jog operations alarm history data clear motor parameters check auto tuning Setting and checking setup parameters Setting and checking user parameters Speed feedback torque commands number of pulses from U phase electrical angle internal status bit display command pulse speed display position deviation input pulse counter Settings mode Monitor mode Alarm history display mode 3 6 Displays contents of alarms that have been previously generated up to a maximum of 10 Operation m Changing Modes To change modes press the MODE SET Key Chapter 3 Power ON Display example C2 C C Status displa Alarm histor mode pay Settings mode Monitor mode display dU bb cn 00 un 00 0 402 3 7 Operation Chapter 3 3 3 3 Mode Changes and Display Contents Power ON Bit Displays page 4 4 Power ON 1 Base block motor not receiving power Status display Positioning completion mode Command pulse input Display example 00 Moto
287. tives Instead connectthe cable shield to the connector plug and ground it directly using a clamp e Connectors Used 36P Nippon Amp Receptacle at Servo Driver 178239 5 Sumitomo 3M Soldered plug at cable side 10136 3000VE Case at cable side 10336 52A0 008 5 9 Specifications Chapter 5 e Pin Arrangement Note Pin 36 is not used on models conforming to EC Directives m Control Input Interface The input circuit for the control I O connector CN1 is as shown in the following diagram External power supply 12 to 24 VDC 30 mA min 24 VIN feed pulse 1 PULS 19 Not used PULS feed pulse CW A A phase 2 ICWIA direction 20 Not used 3 SIGN signal for 21 Not used direction CCW B ward pulse 4 SIGN signal for B phase 22 Not used CCW B ward pulse deviation B phase 5 ECRST counter re 23 Not used deviation set 6 ECRST counter re 24 Not used set Brake 7 BKIR interlock 25 Not used Positioning output 8 INP completed 26 Not used output 9 Not used 27 Not used Output 10 ground 28 Not used common 11 Not used 29 Not used 12 Not used 30 Not used Control DC 13 24VIN 12 to 31 Not used Run com 24 V input Encoder 14 RUN mand
288. tor malfunction 3 2 Operation Chapter 3 3 1 Operational Procedure 3 1 1 Beginning Operation Before beginning operation be sure to make the initial settings for the Servo Driver Make function settings as required according to the use of the Servomotor Any incorrect settings in the parameters could cause unexpected motor operation creating an extremely dangerous situation Use the procedures provided in this section to carefully set all parameters m Startup Procedure 1 Mounting and Installation Installthe Servomotor and Servo Driver according to the installation conditions Chapter 2 section 2 1 Wiring and Connections Connect to power supply and peripheral devices Chapter 2 section 2 2 2 3 The specified installation and wiring conditions are particularly important to ensure that models con forming to EC Directives actually conform to the EC Directive in the final system Turning on Power Supply Before turning on the power supply check the necessary items In order to make the initial settings turn on an application power supply Chapter 3 section 3 2 Checking Display Status Check by means of the displays to see whether there are any internal errors in the Servo Driver Chapter 3 section 3 2 Initial Settings Make the settings for the operation setup parameters initial settings Chapter 3 section 3 4 Function Settings By means of the user parameters set the functions acco
289. tradas de Encoder Codigo Binario Absoluto Gray 2 puntos 4 KHz Tarjeta de Selecciones Anal gicas 41 105 Selectores potenci metros 4 puntos 1 pero LOS Anal gicos DOS ALA VEZ Tarjeta de E S Cuatro Entradas 0 a 5V 0a 10V 10a CQM1H MAB42 NO SI Anal gicas 10V 0a 20 mA Dos Salidas 0 a 20 mA 10 a 10V Tarjeta de Un Puerto RS 232C y un puerto RS CQM1H SCB41 SI Comunicaciones 422A 485 Serie OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 2 2 COMIH CTB41 2 41 2 1 Funciones OMRON ELECTRONICS S A TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH CQM1H CTB41 Tarjeta contador de alta ve locidad Conector CAT Entrada de pulsos 1 Entrada de pulsos 2 Conector CN2 Entrada de pulsos 3 Entrada de pulsos 4 L al Es una tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad que tiene 4 Entradas de Pulsos y 4 Salidas Externas como Resultado de la Comparaci n Tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad Tarjeta de Contador de Alta Velocidad Encoders Incrementales 8 Maximo Entradas de Pulsos 1 a 4 de Contador de Alta Velocidad La CQM1H CTB41 es capaz de contar pulsos desde 50 a 500 KHz a trav s de los puertos 1 a 4 y desarrollar tareas en funci n del n mero de pulsos contados Los 4 puertos se pueden utilizar independientemente Modos de Entrada Se dispone de 3 modos de entrada Modo de Fase Diferencial 1x 2x 4x Modo Adelante Atras
290. tration Tools page and select Tag Debug from the Tools menu IBBIO Device Stats Y Tag Debug In the dialog provided type in Pump_1_Mode alternatively use the Browse feature to navigate and select the same tag and then click Read Tag Debug xmi Pump 1 Mode Browse Tag Value 0 Write Close If the pump is currently in Manual the Tag Value should return a 1 If it is Automatic it should return a 0 Verify that the correct value was returned by checking the state of the lights on MyPage Change the value to the opposite state by typing a 1 or 0 into the Tag Value to replace the value that was read Click Write Verify that the new value was written to the tag both by clicking Read again and by checking the state of the lights on MyPage WARNING Tag Debug is a powerful utility that can access any tag in the CitectSCADA system and both verify its state value as well as change it As such it should be used with caution especially when changing values for tags which control equipment 75 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Backing Up Your Project It is important to keep backup copies of your project so that you can always recover from a disaster with minimum effort Make sure you are in the Citect Explorer click on the bd icon or use Alt Tab and have the Tutorial project selected o Click on the Backup icon File View Tools Help Tutorial al al amp lL zs
291. try R88D UEPLILIW Single phase 100 115 VAC 85 to 127 V 50 60 Hz Main circuit DC When there is a high level of regenerative energy in a multi axis system the output terminals can be connected together and the terminals can be connected together to increase the ability to absorb regenerative energy Motor connection These are the output terminals to the Servomotor Be careful to wire terminals them correctly R88D UEP IV Single phase 200 230 VAC 170 to 253 V 50 60 Hz Green Ground to a class 3 ground to 100 Q or less or better Note Refer to 3 8 Regenerative Energy Absorption for the methods to calculate regenerative energy 2 30 System Design and Installation Chapter 2 m Terminal Block Wire Sizes The following table shows the rated effective currents flowing to the Servo Driver and the sizes of the electrical wires e Servo Drivers with 200 VAC Input R88D UEP V Driver Watts R88D UEP04V R88D UEP08V R88D UEP12V R88D UEP20V 100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W Power supply input current L1 L2 25 4 0 A 6 0 A 11 0A Motor output current U V W 0 87 A 2 0 A 2 6 4 4 Power supply input terminal wire size 0 75 mm or AWG 18 min Motor output terminal wire size 0 5 mm or AWG AWG 20 see note to AWG 18 20 Use OMRON standard cable The applicable wire size for motor connectors is AWG22 to AWG18 Protective earth terminal wire size Use 2 0 mm external gro
292. ue se puede montar La Tarjeta de E S Anal gicas CQM1H MAB42 s lo se puede montar en el Slot 2 slot derecho del CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 6 3 Especificaciones Entradas Anal gicas Valores de los Datos de Entrada y los Convertidos tiio 10 Y is inv Lise nd vnl Gidea alid 12 66 binary Gala 1268 binary dala k BE A AA ono WY 6 1 265 Haz OBS Hee pete won 4 00 2000 Hen Analog input signal JFEUI iv 5w 10 V or bo 20 m Cure bac DPFF ro ee eae er ht eo ee kasa ao ae gin signal v 25v gw ning input signa l m 20 rn Salidas Anal gicas Configuraci n y Dato de Salida J 0 jo t Dto 20 m Ando oulpul Arnao uti signal 4104 TE m STE TEI Hac E mI Selling 12 144 id m T j iaa AB u Wax binary data DIM A Sel tw 121 68 pa ur caa Pag 22 OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR MODULOS CPU DOC 6 COMIH MAB42 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 6 4 Pineado del Puerto CN1 y CN2 CN1 Entradas Anal gicas Situaci n de los Pines Nede Pin Nombre Funci n Entrada Anal gica 4 Entrada de Tensi n 2 V4 Entrada Anal gica 4 com n entrada de Ee tensi n entrada de corriente 4 V3 Entrada Anal gica 3 com n entrada de e tensi n entrada corriente 5
293. ump 1 CMD Click tne OFF symbol Set button and select the Red light from the lights round library then select the Green light for the ON symbol Y Appearance Movement Scaling Fill Input Slider lt lt Access Type ON symbol when 4 On off Pump_1_CMD C Multi state C Array C Animated OFF symbol ON symbol Set Set Q c 9 red green Clear Property asia A At Runtime when Pump_1_CMD is on i e equals 1 the Green Light will be displayed and when it is off i e equals 0 the Red Light will be displayed 29 D DIGITAL tag types do not require 1 in their symbol detection logic because CitectSCADA knows that they only have two states corresponding to the two symbol states available This is a little different to when we were writing commands to the tag and we had to explicitly tell CitectSCADA which state to set the DIGITAL tag to 30 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Creating Graphics Pages Aligning Objects It is worthwhile making your pages look aesthetically pleasing as it will encourage operators to use the system and also makes it faster to find information on the screen Making sure everything is drawn precisely aligned correctly and evenly spaced also helps to make your pages look professional You can align objects manually by dragging them around the screen until you have positioned them satisfactorily and for which the
294. ump_1_Mode will be inserted into the Up Command edit box Click your mouse to the right of the Tag Pump_1_Mode and type 1 Button Properties Appearance Movement v Input Access Up command Pump 1 Mode JL Action Down Repeat lt A 2 x 5 Logging Log message Repeat rate 500 lex milliseconds Clear Property Cancel Apply Help When the project is running pressing on the Manual Button will set the tag Pump_1_Mode to a value of 1 to represent Manual mode Repeated pressing of the button will continue to set the same value of 1 into the tag Therefore we need a second button to set the tag to a value of 0 or Auto mode We will achieve this by copying the first button and modifying the copy We do this because it is often quicker to make copies of objects than to draw them from scratch This also guarantees consistency of object sizes Here is a quick way to make a copy and position an object Place the cursor over the Manual Button Hold down the Ctrl key Hold down the left mouse button Move the mouse to position the copy Release the left mouse button You don t need to be precise with position at this time we will fix that later using an alignment tool If you move the mouse immediately after holding down left mouse Manual button then you will only see the outli
295. un destornillador de estrella OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 20 6 COMIH MAB42 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 6 CQM1H MAB42 COM1H MAB42 Tarjeta de E S anal gicas Conector Entradas anal gicas 124 Conector CN2 Salidas anal gicas ly Se trata de una Tarjeta Opcional de E S Anal gicas que tiene 4 Entradas Anal gicas y 2 Salidas Anal gicas Los rangos de sefial que se pueden utilizar para cada una de las entradas anal gicas son de 10v a 10v 0 a 5v y 0 a 20mA Se puede configurar el rango de forma individual para cada punto de entrada La configuraci n de los rangos para los puntos de entrada se realiza en el DM661 1 Los rangos de sefial que se pueden utilizar para cada una de las salidas anal gicas son de 10 a 10v y de O 20mA Se puede configurar el rango de forma individual para cada punto de salida La configuraci n de los rangos se realiza en el DM661 1 La Tarjeta Opcional CQM1H MAB42 es exactamente igual que los puertos de entradas y salidas anal gicos que incorporaba el 1 CPUA5 Se comporta del mismo modo se programa y pone en marcha de la misma forma y tienen las mismas caracter sticas 6 1 Configuraci n del Sistema Tarjeta de E S Anal gicas 4 Puntos de Entrada Anal gica 2 Puntos de Salida Anal gica OMRON ELECTRONICS S A GR COMIH MODULOS CPU DOC Pag 21 6 COM1H MAB42 TARJETAS OPCIONALES DEL COMIH 6 2 Slot en el q
296. und wires Use the same wire as used for the motor output Note Ifthe cable length is 15 meters or longer for a 750 W Servomotor the momentary maximum torque at rota tion speeds of 2 500 r min or higher may drop by approximately 796 e Servo Drivers with 100 VAC Input R88D UEP W Driver model Watts R88D UEP10W 100 W R88D UEP12W 200 W R88D UEP15W 300 W Power supply input curent L1 L 00A Motor output curent U VW Power supply input terminal wire size 0 75 mm or AWG 18 min Motor output terminal wire size AWG 20 to AWG 18 Use OMRON standard cable The applicable wire size for motor connectors is AWG22 to AWG18 Protective earth terminal wire size Use 2 0 mm external ground wires Use the same wire as used for the motor output m Wire Sizes and Allowable Current The following table shows allowable currents when there are three electrical wires Use values equal to or lower than the specified values e Heat resistant Vinyl Wiring UL1007 Rated Temperature 80 C Reference Value Nominal cross Configuration Conductive sectional area wires mm resistance ambient temperature imm m p fs 95 es 58 s fors o 7090 fs s oo so ess oo 77 fo 2 3 3 Wiring Products Conforming to EMC Directives Models conforming to EC Directive will meet the requirements of the EMC Directives EN55011 Class A Group 1 EMI and EN50082 2 EMS
297. ure a trend tag to store trend data Switch to Citect Project Editor click on d icon or use Alt Tab keys On the Project Editor Menu click on Tags then click on Trend Tags File Edit Tags Alarms System Communication Servers Tools Window Help lt gt el Variable Tags Local Variables Trend Tags SPC Tags Fill the Trend tag form as below then click Add Remember to use drop downs where possible Trend Tag Name Pump_1_Speed MyCluster Y Pump 1 Speed gt Trigger Sample Period 0 500 Pump 1 Speed osete Record 1 Cluster Name Expression Type TRN_PERIODIC Comment Configuring Trends continued the Variable Tag fields you can place an expression eg Pump_1_Mode 0 to reverse the alarm detection logic Privilege levels are unique by default not hierarchical This means that a user with privilege level 6 does not automatically get access to level 5 functions ant your users to cess to more than ilege level then you should include all of those levels in the privilege field as shown in the configuration examples To change the behavior of the system to hierarchical privileges refer to the online help 57 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 This configuration will log the Pump 1 Speed to disk every Y second Most installations would typically log the majority of their data at 2 secon
298. us display Power ON mode Settings mode Monitor mode Alarm history display mode Display example bb cn 00 un 00 0 a02 T g 4 1 2 Status Display Mode The status display mode is entered when powering up or by means of the MODE SET Key In the status display mode Servo Driver status is displayed in two ways bit data and symbols These displays are shown in the following illustration Rotation detected Current limit detected Positioning completed it E Base block _ D D Command pulse input Power supply ON Bit data display Symbol display m Bit Data Display Contents Power supply ON Lit when Servo Driver power supply is ON Base block Lit during base block no power to motor dimmed when servo is ON Positioning completed Lit when the pulse count remaining on the deviation counter is equal to or less than the positioning completed range set in Cn 1b Rotation detection Lit when the motor rotational speed is 20 r min or higher Command pulse input Lit when the specified command pulse is being input m Symbol Display Contents Symbol display bb Base block no power to motor Forward rotation prohibited Reverse rotation prohibited a Alarm display Refer to alarm table 4 4 Application Chapter 4 4 1 3 Monitor Mode Un m Types o
299. uto tuning Adjust the gain manually 4 12 Application Chapter 4 Symptom Probable cause _Wemstocheck Countermeasures Servomotor is overheating There are unusual noises Vibration is occurring at the same frequency as the applicable power supply Check to be sure that the ambient temperature around the Servomotor is no higher than 40 C The ambient temperature is too high Lower the ambient tempera ture to 40 C or lower Use a cooler or fan Ventilation is obstructed Check to see whether any Ensure adequate ventilation thing is blocking ventilation There is an overload Check the torque command value by means of monitor mode The correspondence be Check the models tween the Servo Driver and the Servomotor is incorrect The machinery is vibrating Inspect the machinery to see whether there are any for eign objects in the movable parts or whether there is any damage deformation or looseness The speed loop gain adjust ment is insufficient Check to see whether the Servo Driver control signal lines are too long Check to see whether con trol signal lines and power supply lines are too close to each other Inductive noise is occurring Lighten the load Change to a larger capac ity Servomotor Combine models that corre spond correctly Fix any problems causing vibration Use auto tuning Adjust the gain manually speed loop ga
300. utorial V7 10 Runtime Process Analyst continued Display remove pen cursor Once displayed click and drag the cursor to reposition it on the graph gt Display remove pen cursor labels Once displayed click and drag them to reposition them on the graph Toggle the object pane at the bottom of the page which lists display This creates more room for the graph pane Toggle Auto Scroll a Zoom in 50 z Zoom out Zoom using a click and drag zoom box ial Process Analyst Process Analyst Pages Trends Alarms Tools Q O mmmomeo m 8 o gi d S amp B 2 Z e Bue 10 22 2008 8 15 00 AM i E 10 22 2008 9 20 00 AM 500 i 9p l1 400 300 200 F F 100 E 9 293 10 22 2008 09 12 57 000 21 10 Minutes u s elj amp S 10 22 2008 09 22 57 000 21 Object Tree Scale Engineering Units EZ Panel 92 Z Pump 1 mode We will now modify the appearance of the Process Analyst display Click on the Properties button 67 68 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Runtime Process Analyst continued Main Page Toolbars Object View Pump 1 Speed Pump 1 mode Appearance B a Default Settings Backaround color gt All pens Performance tuning cis Cursor 014 Process Analyst View ie Process Analyst View properties B Panel General Server Paths
301. w Green 3 CCW with resistance 13 4 CCW CCW without resistance 14 ul 16K 5 ECRST X axis deviation counter reset output 4 NV I 6 ECRST positioning completed input 8 g INP RE 121024 VDC 52 R88A CRUCILICIO X axis origin input 10 1 Ht 33 ZCOM Encoder Cable X axis origin common 11 2 7 X Y axis input common 22 i EE 7 13 24VIN X axis external interrupt input 6 OO OO I 14 RUN X axis origin proximity input 7 OO OO i 18 RESET X axis CCW limit input 17 40 CW limit input 18 ee gt a5 ALMCOM X Y axis emergency stop input 19 ee 10 Fe Ga 34 ALM 24VDC y Lo FG FG 12 R88A CPULILILIS General purpose Cable Note 1 Incorrect signal wiring can cause damage to Units and the Servo Driver Note 2 Leave unused signal lines open and do not wire them Note 3 Use mode 2 for origin search Note 4 Use dedicated power supply 24 VDC for command pulse signals Note 5 ERB44 02 diodes by Fuji Electric or equivalent are recommended for surge absorption Note 6 This wiring diagram is an example of X axis wiring only If two axis control is used the external input and Servo Driver wiring must be done in the same way for the Y axis Note 7 Use the RUN signal to set whether the Servo can be turned ON OFF Note 8 Class 3 grounds must be to 100 Q or less Note 9 The Servo Relay Unit and Cables for the R
302. xplanation indicate operations using the Handy type Parameter Unit 1 2 0 0 0 0 lt N 5 NI X Indicates settings mode System check mode Data 4 ON CO OFF 4 Operating Procedure Key in Parentheses are for Mounted type Parameter Units Confirm that the initial display is shown bb Press the MODE SET Key to enter the settings mode Using the Up and Down Keys set parameter number 00 System check mode Press the DATA Key to display the setting of Cn 00 Using the Up and Down Keys set the parameter to 00 Jog operation Press the MODE SET Key to shift to the jog display Press the SERVO DATA Key to turn on the servo Press the Up Key to jog forward Forward operation will continue as long as the key is held down Press the Down Key to jog in reverse Reverse operation will continue as long as the key is held down 10 Press the SERVO DATA Key to turn off the servo 11 Press the MODE SET Key to return to the data display 12 Press the DATA Key to return to the settings mode AON O OQ OO N gt Note The motor speed for jogging is 500 r min The jogging speed cannot be changed 3 20 Operation Chapter 3 3 7 Making Adjustments 3 7 1 Auto tuning Auto tuning rotates the Servomotor with a load conn
303. xt sensitive information with just a mouse click Read the CitectHMI SCADA knowledgebase This is available on the CitectHMI SCADA software CD or from our website www citect com Worst case start again just create a new project and call it Tutorial2 The upside to this is the extra practice will make you more proficient If nothing appears to happen when you press a button do not press it repeatedly in the hope that something will happen chances are your is busy trying to do what you ve already asked it to do 78 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Addendum Security Validation CitectSCADA V7 10 contains additional security functions to make it easier for companies to implement electronic signatures and multi user validation This last exercise will modify the Pump 1 manual button to require signature validation before setting the Pump_1_Mode value to 1 Switch to the Graphics Builder click on the Graphics Builder icon lt Open your MyPage graphics display and double click on the Manual button to access it s animation properties Click on the Input tab and modify the command to MultiSignatureTagWrite Pump 1 Mode 1 kernel Button Properties Appearance Movement Y Input Access Up command MultisignatureTagWrite Pump 1 Mode 1 kernel IL lt Action lt gt 5 E Down Repeat Logging Log message spueuiuio
304. y Materials Chapter 6 6 1 Connection Examples m Connecting to SYSMAC C200H NC112 Position Control Unit with 5 VDC Power Supply MCCB Main circuit power supply MC RO 6 9 OFF ON ON aN R88D UEPOOL 3 20 i 100 115 VAC 50 60 Hz o R88D UEPOOH 200 230 VAC 50 60 Hz z P I TO 6 O O p C200H NC112 L Class 3 ground R88D UEPOOO AC Servomotor Driver Contents Terminal CN1 TB Output power supply input 24 VDC 1 A c R CAAS E A has T R88M UE B Connect external AC Servomotor 2 eration Unit as required Output power supply input 5 VDC B M I N m R88A CAU 5 5VDC U Power Cable PA CCW with resistance A T White gt BL x MS De 4 re gt Blue 1 1 LA COW without resistance B ZN 4 ccw w Green 2 CW with resistance 4 LA e 1 CW PSI E 2 without resistance B 2 CW 1 x ov 5 Fg ECRST UNE Deviation counter reset output A ECRST TN onsec ON c CM SUE MNT 6 4
305. ypes of items to be added to the menu New Page Items under new Pages will only be available when the user is looking at a page of the same name This allows menu items to be hidden unless on a particular page New Button Adds another button to the navigation bar allowing additional pull down menus to be created New Item Adds an item into the pull down menu of a Button New Sub Item Extends pull down menus to have child menus which will appear when selected from the parent menu 73 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Administrative Tools Configuring the Menu continued This pull down item is now configured to display MyPage when it is selected from the navigation bar E Men New Button Single click on the New Item and change its name to My Page es MyPage Men i Page Single click on the New Button and change its name to My Menu Click on the icon to close the Menu Configuration dialog When prompted make sure you save the changes you have made These changes will take effect when you next change pages Select a new page from the navigation bar and verify that your new menu appears with the new page as shown below MyPage Cent MyPage Trends Alarms Tools 74 Quickstart Tutorial V7 10 Administrative Tools Tag Debug Finally we will look at an extremely useful testing and commissioning tool the Tag Debugger Return to the Adminis

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

BAÑOMOL  No 44    NetComm V85 User's Manual  Manual de Instrucciones  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file